You are on page 1of 376

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

International General Certificate of Secondary Education


*7667729700*

CHEMISTRY 0620/32
Paper 3 (Extended) May/June 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


For Examiner’s Use
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
1
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 2

Total

This document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB10 06_0620_32/2RP
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
2
For
1 For each of the following unfamiliar elements predict one physical and one chemical Examiner’s
property. Use

(a) caesium (Cs)

physical property ..............................................................................................................

chemical property .............................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) vanadium (V)

physical property ..............................................................................................................

chemical property .............................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) fluorine (F)

physical property ..............................................................................................................

chemical property .............................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]

2 The hydrolysis of complex carbohydrates to simple sugars is catalysed by enzymes called


carbohydrases and also by dilute acids.

(a) (i) They are both catalysts. How do enzymes differ from catalysts such as dilute
acids?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Explain why ethanol, C2H6O, is not a carbohydrate but glucose, C6H12O6, is a
carbohydrate.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Draw the structure of a complex carbohydrate, such as starch. The formula of a simple
sugar can be represented by HO OH .

[3]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/M/J/10


3
For
(c) Iodine reacts with starch to form a deep blue colour. Examiner’s
Use
(i) In the experiment illustrated below, samples are removed at intervals and tested
with iodine in potassium iodide solution.

pipette to
remove samples

hot water

aqueous starch and


a few drops of saliva
(saliva contains enzymes)

Typical results of this experiment are shown in the table.

colour of sample tested with iodine


time / min
in potassium iodide solution

0 deep blue
10 pale blue
30 colourless

Explain these results.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(ii) If the experiment was repeated at a higher temperature, 60 °C, all the samples stayed
blue. Suggest an explanation.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/M/J/10 [Turn over


4
For
3 The following are examples of redox reactions. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Bromine water was added to aqueous sodium sulfide.

Br2(aq) + S2–(aq) → 2Br –(aq) + S(s)

(i) Describe what you would observe when this reaction occurs.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Write a symbol equation for this reaction.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Explain, in terms of electron transfer, why bromine is the oxidant (oxidising agent) in
this reaction.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Iron and steel in the presence of water and oxygen form rust.

colourless
gas forms

oxygen dissolved
in water

electrons
Fe2+ goes
move
into solution
in metal

The reactions involved are:

reaction 1
Fe → Fe2+ + 2e–

The electrons move through the iron on to the surface where a colourless gas forms.

reaction 2
Fe2+ + 2OH– → Fe(OH)2
from water

reaction 3
..........Fe(OH)2 + O2 + ..........H2O → ..........Fe(OH)3

The water evaporates to leave rust.

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/M/J/10


5
For
(i) What type of reaction is reaction 1? .................................................................... [1] Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Deduce the name of the colourless gas mentioned in reaction 1.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) What is the name of the iron compound formed in reaction 2?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) Balance the equation for reaction 3.

..........Fe(OH)2 + O2 + ..........H2O → ..........Fe(OH)3


[1]

(v) Explain why the change Fe(OH)2 to Fe(OH)3 is oxidation.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(vi) Explain why iron in electrical contact with a piece of zinc does not rust.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 13]

4 But-1-ene is a typical alkene. It has the structural formula shown below.

CH3 CH2 CH CH2

The structural formula of cyclobutane is given below.

H H
H H
C C

C C
H H
H H

(a) These two hydrocarbons are isomers.

(i) Define the term isomer.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/M/J/10 [Turn over


6
For
(ii) Draw the structural formula of another isomer of but-1-ene. Examiner’s
Use

[1]

(iii) Describe a test which would distinguish between but-1-ene and cyclobutane.

reagent ......................................................................................................................

result with but-1-ene ..................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

result with cyclobutane ..............................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) Describe how alkenes, such as but-1-ene, can be made from alkanes.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Name the product formed when but-1-ene reacts with:

bromine, ...................................................................................................................... [1]

hydrogen, .................................................................................................................... [1]

steam. ......................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/M/J/10


7
For
5 Fuel cells are used in spacecraft to produce electrical energy. Examiner’s
Use

hydrogen

anode

electrolyte
oxygen
cathode

(a) How is oxygen obtained from liquid air?

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Hydrogen and oxygen react to form water.

2H2 + O2 → 2H2O

(i) Give an example of bond breaking in the above reaction.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Give an example of bond forming in the above reaction.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Is the change given in (i) exothermic or endothermic?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) (i) Give two reasons why hydrogen may be considered to be the ideal fuel for the
future.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Suggest a reason why hydrogen is not widely used at the moment.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/M/J/10 [Turn over


8
For
6 Thallium is a metal in Group III. It has oxidation states of +1 and +3. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Give the formula for the following thallium compounds.

(i) thallium(I) sulfide .................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) thallium(III) chloride ............................................................................................. [1]

(b) Thallium(I) chloride is insoluble in water. Complete the description of the preparation of
a pure sample of this salt.

Step 1

Mix a solution of sodium chloride with thallium(I) sulfate solution. A white precipitate
forms.

Step 2

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

Step 3

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

Step 4

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) When thallium(I) chloride is exposed to light, a photochemical reaction occurs. It changes
from a white solid to a violet solid.

(i) Name another metal halide which changes colour when exposed to light. Give the
major use of this metal halide.

name ..........................................................................................................................

use ....................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/M/J/10


9
For
(ii) A piece of paper coated with thallium(I) chloride is exposed to a bright light. Examiner’s
Use
paper coated with
thallium(I) chloride
lamp

Suggest two ways of increasing the time it takes for the violet colour to appear.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(d) Thallium(I) hydroxide is an alkali. It has similar properties to sodium hydroxide.

(i) Complete the following word equation.

thallium(I) ammonium ......................


+ → + ...................... + ......................
hydroxide sulfate
......................
[1]

(ii) Complete the equation.

............ Tl OH + H2SO4 → .................. + ..................


[2]

(iii) Aqueous thallium(I) hydroxide was added to aqueous iron(II) sulfate. Describe what
you would see and complete the ionic equation for the reaction.

observation ................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

equation Fe2+ + ....... OH– → ................ [1]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/M/J/10 [Turn over


10
For
7 Aluminium was first isolated in 1827 using sodium. Examiner’s
Use
Al Cl 3 + 3Na → Al + 3NaCl

Aluminium, obtained by this method, was more expensive than gold.

(a) Suggest an explanation why aluminium was so expensive.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) The modern method for extracting aluminium is the electrolysis of a molten electrolyte,
aluminium oxide dissolved in cryolite. The aluminium oxide decomposes.

2Al 2O3 → 4Al + 3O2

Both electrodes are made of carbon.

(i) Give two reasons why the oxide is dissolved in cryolite.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Complete the ionic equation for the reaction at the anode.

.......... O2– → O2 + ......... e–


[2]

(iii) Why do the carbon anodes need to be replaced frequently?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) The electrolysis of a molten electrolyte is one method of extracting a metal from its ore.
Other methods are the electrolysis of an aqueous solution and the reduction of the oxide
by carbon. Explain why these last two methods cannot be used to extract aluminium.

electrolysis of an aqueous solution ...................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

using carbon .....................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/M/J/10


11
For
8 Nitrogen dioxide is a brown gas. It can be made by heating certain metal nitrates. Examiner’s
Use
2Pb(NO3)2 → 2PbO + 4NO2 + O2

(a) (i) Name another metal whose nitrate decomposes to give the metal oxide, nitrogen
dioxide and oxygen.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Complete the word equation for a metal whose nitrate does not give nitrogen dioxide
on decomposition.

metal nitrate → ..................................................... + oxygen


[1]

(b) At most temperatures, samples of nitrogen dioxide are equilibrium mixtures.

2NO2(g) N2O4(g)
dark brown pale yellow

(i) At 25 °C, the mixture contains 20 % of nitrogen dioxide. At 100 °C this has risen to
90 %. Is the forward reaction exothermic or endothermic?
Give a reason for your choice.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Explain why the colour of the equilibrium mixture becomes lighter when the pressure
on the mixture is increased.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/M/J/10 [Turn over


12
For
(c) A 5.00 g sample of impure lead(II) nitrate was heated. The volume of oxygen formed was Examiner’s
0.16 dm3 measured at r.t.p. The impurities did not decompose. Use
Calculate the percentage of lead(II) nitrate in the sample.

2Pb(NO3)2 → 2PbO + 4NO2 + O2

Number of moles of O2 formed = .......................................

Number of moles of Pb(NO3)2 in the sample = .......................................

Mass of one mole of Pb(NO3)2 = 331 g

Mass of lead(II) nitrate in the sample = ....................................... g

Percentage of lead(II) nitrate in sample = ..................................... [4]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/M/J/10


13

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/M/J/10


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/M/J/10


15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/M/J/10


© UCLES 2010
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/32/M/J/10
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*4049475364*

CHEMISTRY 0620/33
Paper 3 (Extended) May/June 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


For Examiner’s Use
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
1
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 2

Total

This document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB10 06_0620_33/FP
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
2
For
1 For each of the following unfamiliar elements predict one physical and one chemical Examiner’s
property. Use

(a) caesium (Cs)

physical property ..............................................................................................................

chemical property .............................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) vanadium (V)

physical property ..............................................................................................................

chemical property .............................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) fluorine (F)

physical property ..............................................................................................................

chemical property .............................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]

2 The hydrolysis of complex carbohydrates to simple sugars is catalysed by enzymes called


carbohydrases and also by dilute acids.

(a) (i) They are both catalysts. How do enzymes differ from catalysts such as dilute
acids?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Explain why ethanol, C2H6O, is not a carbohydrate but glucose, C6H12O6, is a
carbohydrate.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Draw the structure of a complex carbohydrate, such as starch. The formula of a simple
sugar can be represented by HO OH .

[3]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/M/J/10


3
For
(c) Iodine reacts with starch to form a deep blue colour. Examiner’s
Use
(i) In the experiment illustrated below, samples are removed at intervals and tested
with iodine in potassium iodide solution.

pipette to
remove samples

hot water

aqueous starch and


a few drops of saliva
(saliva contains enzymes)

Typical results of this experiment are shown in the table.

colour of sample tested with iodine


time / min
in potassium iodide solution

0 deep blue
10 pale blue
30 colourless

Explain these results.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(ii) If the experiment was repeated at a higher temperature, 60 °C, all the samples stayed
blue. Suggest an explanation.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/M/J/10 [Turn over


4
For
3 The following are examples of redox reactions. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Bromine water was added to aqueous sodium sulfide.

Br2(aq) + S2–(aq) → 2Br –(aq) + S(s)

(i) Describe what you would observe when this reaction occurs.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Write a symbol equation for this reaction.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Explain, in terms of electron transfer, why bromine is the oxidant (oxidising agent) in
this reaction.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Iron and steel in the presence of water and oxygen form rust.

colourless
gas forms

oxygen dissolved
in water

electrons
Fe2+ goes
move
into solution
in metal

The reactions involved are:

reaction 1
Fe → Fe2+ + 2e–

The electrons move through the iron on to the surface where a colourless gas forms.

reaction 2
Fe2+ + 2OH– → Fe(OH)2
from water

reaction 3
..........Fe(OH)2 + O2 + ..........H2O → ..........Fe(OH)3

The water evaporates to leave rust.

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/M/J/10


5
For
(i) What type of reaction is reaction 1? .................................................................... [1] Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Deduce the name of the colourless gas mentioned in reaction 1.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) What is the name of the iron compound formed in reaction 2?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) Balance the equation for reaction 3.

..........Fe(OH)2 + O2 + ..........H2O → ..........Fe(OH)3


[1]

(v) Explain why the change Fe(OH)2 to Fe(OH)3 is oxidation.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(vi) Explain why iron in electrical contact with a piece of zinc does not rust.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 13]

4 But-1-ene is a typical alkene. It has the structural formula shown below.

CH3 CH2 CH CH2

The structural formula of cyclobutane is given below.

H H
H H
C C

C C
H H
H H

(a) These two hydrocarbons are isomers.

(i) Define the term isomer.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/M/J/10 [Turn over


6
For
(ii) Draw the structural formula of another isomer of but-1-ene. Examiner’s
Use

[1]

(iii) Describe a test which would distinguish between but-1-ene and cyclobutane.

reagent ......................................................................................................................

result with but-1-ene ..................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

result with cyclobutane ..............................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) Describe how alkenes, such as but-1-ene, can be made from alkanes.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Name the product formed when but-1-ene reacts with:

bromine, ...................................................................................................................... [1]

hydrogen, .................................................................................................................... [1]

steam. ......................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/M/J/10


7
For
5 Fuel cells are used in spacecraft to produce electrical energy. Examiner’s
Use

hydrogen

anode

electrolyte
oxygen
cathode

(a) How is oxygen obtained from liquid air?

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Hydrogen and oxygen react to form water.

2H2 + O2 → 2H2O

(i) Give an example of bond breaking in the above reaction.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Give an example of bond forming in the above reaction.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Is the change given in (i) exothermic or endothermic?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) (i) Give two reasons why hydrogen may be considered to be the ideal fuel for the
future.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Suggest a reason why hydrogen is not widely used at the moment.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/M/J/10 [Turn over


8
For
6 Thallium is a metal in Group III. It has oxidation states of +1 and +3. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Give the formula for the following thallium compounds.

(i) thallium(I) sulfide .................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) thallium(III) chloride ............................................................................................. [1]

(b) Thallium(I) chloride is insoluble in water. Complete the description of the preparation of
a pure sample of this salt.

Step 1

Mix a solution of sodium chloride with thallium(I) sulfate solution. A white precipitate
forms.

Step 2

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

Step 3

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

Step 4

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) When thallium(I) chloride is exposed to light, a photochemical reaction occurs. It changes
from a white solid to a violet solid.

(i) Name another metal halide which changes colour when exposed to light. Give the
major use of this metal halide.

name ..........................................................................................................................

use ....................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/M/J/10


9
For
(ii) A piece of paper coated with thallium(I) chloride is exposed to a bright light. Examiner’s
Use
paper coated with
thallium(I) chloride
lamp

Suggest two ways of increasing the time it takes for the violet colour to appear.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(d) Thallium(I) hydroxide is an alkali. It has similar properties to sodium hydroxide.

(i) Complete the following word equation.

thallium(I) ammonium ......................


+ → + ...................... + ......................
hydroxide sulfate
......................
[1]

(ii) Complete the equation.

............ Tl OH + H2SO4 → .................. + ..................


[2]

(iii) Aqueous thallium(I) hydroxide was added to aqueous iron(II) sulfate. Describe what
you would see and complete the ionic equation for the reaction.

observation ................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

equation Fe2+ + ....... OH– → ................ [1]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/M/J/10 [Turn over


10
For
7 Aluminium was first isolated in 1827 using sodium. Examiner’s
Use
Al Cl 3 + 3Na → Al + 3NaCl

Aluminium, obtained by this method, was more expensive than gold.

(a) Suggest an explanation why aluminium was so expensive.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) The modern method for extracting aluminium is the electrolysis of a molten electrolyte,
aluminium oxide dissolved in cryolite. The aluminium oxide decomposes.

2Al 2O3 → 4Al + 3O2

Both electrodes are made of carbon.

(i) Give two reasons why the oxide is dissolved in cryolite.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Complete the ionic equation for the reaction at the anode.

.......... O2– → O2 + ......... e–


[2]

(iii) Why do the carbon anodes need to be replaced frequently?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) The electrolysis of a molten electrolyte is one method of extracting a metal from its ore.
Other methods are the electrolysis of an aqueous solution and the reduction of the oxide
by carbon. Explain why these last two methods cannot be used to extract aluminium.

electrolysis of an aqueous solution ...................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

using carbon .....................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/M/J/10


11
For
8 Nitrogen dioxide is a brown gas. It can be made by heating certain metal nitrates. Examiner’s
Use
2Pb(NO3)2 → 2PbO + 4NO2 + O2

(a) (i) Name another metal whose nitrate decomposes to give the metal oxide, nitrogen
dioxide and oxygen.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Complete the word equation for a metal whose nitrate does not give nitrogen dioxide
on decomposition.

metal nitrate → ..................................................... + oxygen


[1]

(b) At most temperatures, samples of nitrogen dioxide are equilibrium mixtures.

2NO2(g) N2O4(g)
dark brown pale yellow

(i) At 25 °C, the mixture contains 20 % of nitrogen dioxide. At 100 °C this has risen to
90 %. Is the forward reaction exothermic or endothermic?
Give a reason for your choice.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Explain why the colour of the equilibrium mixture becomes lighter when the pressure
on the mixture is increased.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/M/J/10 [Turn over


12
For
(c) A 5.00 g sample of impure lead(II) nitrate was heated. The volume of oxygen formed was Examiner’s
0.16 dm3 measured at r.t.p. The impurities did not decompose. Use
Calculate the percentage of lead(II) nitrate in the sample.

2Pb(NO3)2 → 2PbO + 4NO2 + O2

Number of moles of O2 formed = .......................................

Number of moles of Pb(NO3)2 in the sample = .......................................

Mass of one mole of Pb(NO3)2 = 331 g

Mass of lead(II) nitrate in the sample = ....................................... g

Percentage of lead(II) nitrate in sample = ..................................... [4]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/M/J/10


13

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/M/J/10


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/M/J/10


15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/M/J/10


© UCLES 2010
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/33/M/J/10
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*6145201818*

CHEMISTRY 0620/31
Paper 3 (Extended) May/June 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


For Examiner’s Use
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
1
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 2

Total

This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB11 06_0620_31/4RP
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2
For
1 The following techniques are used to separate mixtures. Examiner’s
Use
A simple distillation B fractional distillation C evaporation

D chromatography E filtration F diffusion

From this list, choose the most suitable technique to separate the following.

(a) methane from a mixture of the gases, methane and ethane .................. [1]

(b) water from aqueous magnesium sulfate .................. [1]

(c) glycine from a mixture of the amino acids, glycine and lysine ................... [1]

(d) iron filings from a mixture of iron filings and water .................. [1]

(e) zinc sulfate crystals from aqueous zinc sulfate .................. [1]

(f) hexane from a mixture of the liquids, hexane and octane .................. [1]

[Total: 6]

2 Selenium and sulfur are in Group VI. They have similar properties.

(a) One of the main uses of selenium is in photoelectric cells. These cells can change light
into electrical energy.

(i) Name a process which can change light into chemical energy.

....................................................................................................................................

(ii) Name a device which can change chemical energy into electrical energy.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) The electron distribution of a selenium atom is 2 + 8 + 18 + 6.

(i) Selenium forms an ionic compound with potassium. Draw a diagram which shows
the formula of this ionic compound, the charges on the ions and the arrangement of
the valency electrons around the negative ion.
Use o to represent an electron from an atom of potassium.
Use x to represent an electron from an atom of selenium.

[3]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/M/J/11


3
For
(ii) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in one molecule Examiner’s
of the covalent compound selenium chloride. Use
Use x to represent an electron from an atom of selenium.
Use o to represent an electron from an atom of chlorine.

[3]

(iii) Predict two differences in the physical properties of these two compounds.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) The selenide ion reacts with water.

Se2– + H2O → HSe– + OH–

What type of reagent is the selenide ion in this reaction? Give a reason for your choice.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 13]

3 Iron from the blast furnace is impure. It contains about 4 % carbon and 0.5 % silicon. Most
of this impure iron is used to make mild steel, an alloy of iron containing less then 0.25 %
carbon.

(a) A jet of oxygen is blown through the molten iron in the presence of a base, usually
calcium oxide. Explain how the percentage of carbon is reduced and how the silicon is
removed.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/M/J/11 [Turn over


4
For
(b) (i) Why are steel alloys used in preference to iron? Examiner’s
Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) State a use of the following alloys.

mild steel ...................................................................................................................

stainless steel ...................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Both iron and steel have typical metallic structures - a lattice of positive ions and a sea
of electrons.

(i) Suggest an explanation for why they have high melting points.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Explain why, when a force is applied to a piece of steel, it does not break but just
changes its shape.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 11]

4 A major ore of zinc is zinc blende, ZnS. A by-product of the extraction of zinc from this ore is
sulfur dioxide which is used to make sulfuric acid.

(a) (i) Zinc blende is heated in air. Zinc oxide and sulfur dioxide are formed. Write the
balanced equation for this reaction.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Zinc oxide is reduced to zinc by heating with carbon. Name two other reagents
which could reduce zinc oxide.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) The zinc obtained is impure. It is a mixture of metals. Explain how fractional distillation
could separate this mixture.
zinc bp = 908 °C, cadmium bp = 765 °C, lead bp = 1751 °C

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/M/J/11


5
For
(b) Sulfur dioxide is used to make sulfur trioxide in the Contact Process. Examiner’s
Use
2SO2(g) + O2(g) 2SO3(g)

The forward reaction is exothermic. The conditions used are:

temperature: 450 °C
pressure: 2 atmospheres
catalyst: vanadium(V) oxide

Explain, mentioning both position of equilibrium and rate, why these conditions give the
most economic yield.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

[Total: 10]

5 Hydriodic acid, HI(aq), is a strong acid. Its salts are iodides.

(a) It has the reactions of a typical strong acid. Complete the following equations.

(i) ............Li + ............HI → ........................ + ................... [1]

(ii) zinc hydriodic .......................... ..........................


+ → + + .........................
carbonate acid .......................... ..........................
[1]

(iii) MgO + ............HI → ................... + ................... [1]

(b) Two of the reactions in (a) are acid / base and one is redox. Which one is redox? Explain
your choice.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Describe how you could distinguish between hydriodic, HI(aq), and hydrobromic, HBr(aq)
acids, by bubbling chlorine through these two acids.

result with hydriodic acid ..................................................................................................

result with hydrobromic acid ....................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/M/J/11 [Turn over


6
For
(d) 20.0 cm3 of aqueous sodium hydroxide, 2.00 mol / dm3, was placed in a beaker. The Examiner’s
temperature of the alkali was measured and 1.0 cm3 portions of hydriodic acid were Use
added. After each addition, the temperature of the mixture was measured. Typical results
are shown on the graph.

temperature

18.0 cm3 volume of


acid added

NaOH(aq) + HI(aq) → NaI(aq) + H2O(l)

(i) Explain why the temperature increases rapidly at first then stops increasing.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Suggest why the temperature drops after the addition of 18.0 cm3 of acid.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) In another experiment, it was shown that 15.0 cm3 of the acid neutralised 20.0 cm3 of
aqueous sodium hydroxide, 1.00 mol / dm3. Calculate the concentration of the acid.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 12]

6 The structural formula of a butanol is given below.

CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CH2 — OH

(a) Butanol can be made from petroleum and also by fermentation.

(i) Describe the chemistry of making butanol from petroleum by the following route.

petroleum → butene → butanol

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/M/J/11


7
For
(ii) Explain, in general terms, what is meant by fermentation. Examiner’s
Use
....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) Butanol can be oxidised to a carboxylic acid by heating with acidified potassium
manganate(VII). Give the name and structural formula of the carboxylic acid.

name ........................................................................................................................... [1]

structural formula

[1]

(c) Butanol reacts with ethanoic acid to form a liquid, X, which has the sweet smell of
bananas. Its empirical formula is C3H6O and its Mr is 116.

(i) What type of compound is liquid X?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Give the molecular formula of liquid X.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Draw the structural formula of X. Show all the individual bonds.

[2]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/M/J/11 [Turn over


8
For
7 Excess hydrochloric acid was added to powdered zinc. The hydrogen evolved was collected Examiner’s
and its volume measured every 20 seconds. Use

The experiments were repeated at the same temperature using the same number of moles
of powdered magnesium and aluminium.

metal B

metal A
volume of
hydrogen
metal C

time

(a) Identify metals A, B and C by choosing from zinc, magnesium and aluminium. Give a
reason for each choice.

metal A .............................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

metal B .............................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

metal C .............................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [5]

(b) Using ‘moles’, explain why two of the metals form the same volume of hydrogen but the
third metal forms a larger volume.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/M/J/11


9
For
8 There are two types of polymerisation - addition and condensation. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Explain the difference between them.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Poly(dichloroethene) is used to package food. Draw its structure. The structural formula
of dichloroethene is shown below.

H Cl

C C

H Cl

[2]

(c) The polymer known as PVA is used in paints and adhesives. Its structural formula is
shown below.

CH2 CH CH2 CH

OOCCH3 OOCCH3

Deduce the structural formula of its monomer.

[1]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/M/J/11 [Turn over


10
For
(d) A condensation polymer can be made from the following monomers. Examiner’s
Use
HOOC(CH2)4COOH and H2N(CH2)6NH2

Draw the structural formula of this polymer.

[3]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/M/J/11


11

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/M/J/11


© UCLES 2011
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/31/M/J/11
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*8533856820*

CHEMISTRY 0620/32
Paper 3 (Extended) May/June 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


For Examiner’s Use
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
1
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 2

Total

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

IB11 06_0620_32/4RP
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2
For
1 Choose an element from the list below which best fits the description. Examiner’s
Use
Rb Fe Si I P Sr

(a) An element which reacts with cold water. ............... [1]

(b) It is a solid at room temperature and exists as diatomic molecules, X2. ............... [1]

(c) It can form two oxides, XO and X2O3. ............... [1]

(d) This element has a hydride of the type XH3. ............... [1]

(e) It has a macromolecular structure similar to that of carbon. ............... [1]

[Total: 5]

2 Tin is an element in Group IV.

(a) The position of tin in the reactivity series is:

zinc
iron
tin
copper

(i) For each of the following, decide if a reaction would occur. If there is a reaction,
complete the equation, otherwise write ‘no reaction’.

Cu + Sn2+ → ..........................................

Fe + Sn2+ → ..........................................

Sn + Zn2+ → .......................................... [4]

(ii) Name the three products formed when tin(II) nitrate is heated.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Aqueous tin(II) sulfate is electrolysed using carbon electrodes. This electrolysis is similar
to that of aqueous copper(II) sulfate using carbon electrodes.

(i) What is the product at the negative electrode (cathode)?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Write the equation for the reaction at the positive electrode (anode).

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Name the acid formed in this electrolysis.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/M/J/11


3
For
(c) Steel articles can be plated with tin or zinc to prevent rusting. Examiner’s
When the zinc layer is damaged exposing the underlying steel, it does not rust, but when Use
the tin layer is broken the steel rusts. Explain.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/M/J/11 [Turn over


4
For
3 The equation for the reaction between sodium thiosulfate and hydrochloric acid is given Examiner’s
below. Use

Na2S2O3(aq) + 2HCl (aq) → 2NaCl (aq) + S(s) + SO2(g) + H2O(l)

The speed of this reaction was investigated using the following experiment. A beaker
containing 50 cm3 of 0.2 mol / dm3 sodium thiosulfate was placed on a black cross. 5.0 cm3 of
2.0 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid was added and the clock was started.

look down at
cross on paper

solution turns
from colourless sodium thiosulfate
to cloudy and hydrochloric acid

paper
cross on paper

view looking down

Initially the cross was clearly visible. When the solution became cloudy and the cross could
no longer be seen, the clock was stopped and the time recorded.

(a) The experiment was repeated with 25 cm3 of 0.2 mol / dm3 sodium thiosulfate and 25 cm3
of water. Typical results for this experiment and a further two experiments are given in
the table.

experiment 1 2 3 4

volume of thiosulfate / cm3 50 40 25 10


volume of water / cm3 0 10 25 40
volume of acid / cm3 5 5 5 5
total volume / cm3 55 55 55 55
time / s 48 60 96 ..........

(i) Explain why it is necessary to keep the total volume the same in all the
experiments.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Complete the table. [1]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/M/J/11


5
For
(iii) How and why does the speed of the reaction vary from experiment 1 to 4? Examiner’s
Use
....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) The idea of collisions between reacting particles is used to explain changes in the speed
of reactions. Use this idea to explain the following results.

volume of sodium thiosulfate / cm3 25 25


volume of water / cm3 25 25
volume of acid / cm3 5 5
temperature / °C 20 42
time / s 96 40

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/M/J/11 [Turn over


6
For
4 Iron is extracted from its ore, hematite, in the blast furnace. Examiner’s
Use
waste gases

raw materials
coke, C
iron ore, Fe2O3
firebrick lining limestone, CaCO3

air

slag

molten iron

Describe the reactions involved in this extraction. Include in your description an equation for
a redox reaction and one for an acid / base reaction.

..................................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................ [5]

[Total: 5]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/M/J/11


7
For
5 The diagram shows a simple cell. Examiner’s
Use
voltmeter
V

iron electrode zinc electrode

bubbles of
hydrogen dilute
sulfuric acid

(a) Write an equation for the overall reaction occurring in the cell.

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Explain why all cell reactions are exothermic and redox.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) Which electrode, zinc or iron, is the negative electrode? Give a reason for your choice.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Suggest two ways of increasing the voltage of this cell.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/M/J/11 [Turn over


8
For
6 (a) Methanol can be made from a mixture of carbon monoxide and hydrogen. Examiner’s
Use
CO(g) + 2H2(g) CH3OH(g)

The forward reaction is exothermic.

(i) Explain why the concentration of methanol at equilibrium does not change.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Suggest conditions, in terms of temperature and pressure, which would give a high
yield of methanol.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) How would the conditions used in practice compare with those given in (ii)? Give an
explanation of any differences.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Biodiesel is made from a vegetable oil by the following reaction.

C17H35 CO2 CH2 CH2OH

C17H35 CO2 CH + 3CH3OH → 3C17H35COOCH3 + CHOH

C17H35 CO2 CH2 CH2OH

vegetable oil methanol biodiesel glycerol

(i) What type of compound are vegetable oil and biodiesel?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) What other useful product is made from vegetable oil by heating it with aqueous
sodium hydroxide?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Suggest an explanation why making and using biodiesel has a smaller effect on
the percentage of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere than using petroleum-based
diesel.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/M/J/11


9
For
(c) Petroleum-based diesel is a mixture of hydrocarbons, such as octane and octene. Examiner’s
Use
(i) ‘Oct’ means eight carbon atoms per molecule. Draw a structural formula of an octene
molecule.

[1]

(ii) Describe a test which would distinguish between octane and octene.

test .............................................................................................................................

result with octane .......................................................................................................

result with octene ................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 14]

7 Chlorine reacts with phosphorus to form phosphorus trichloride.

(a) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in one molecule of
the covalent compound, phosphorus trichloride.
Use x to represent an electron from a phosphorus atom.
Use o to represent an electron from a chlorine atom.

[2]

(b) Phosphorus trichloride reacts with water to form two acids.

(i) Balance the equation for this reaction.

PCl 3 + .......H2O → .......HCl + H3PO3


[1]

(ii) Describe how you could show that phosphorus acid, H3PO3, is a weaker acid than
hydrochloric acid.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/M/J/11 [Turn over


10
For
(iii) Two salts of phosphorus acid are its sodium salt, which is soluble in water, and its Examiner’s
calcium salt which is insoluble in water. Suggest a method of preparation for each of Use
these salts from aqueous phosphorus acid. Specify any other reagent needed and
briefly outline the method.

sodium salt ................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

calcium salt ................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 10]

8 Hydrocarbons are compounds which contain only carbon and hydrogen.

(a) 20 cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon was burned in 120 cm3 of oxygen, which is in excess.
After cooling, the volume of the gases remaining was 90 cm3. Aqueous sodium hydroxide
was added to remove carbon dioxide, 30 cm3 of oxygen remained. All volumes were
measured at r.t.p..

(i) Explain why it is essential to use excess oxygen.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Carbon dioxide is slightly soluble in water. Why does it dissolve readily in the alkali,
sodium hydroxide?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Complete the following.

volume of gaseous hydrocarbon = ...............cm3

volume of oxygen used = .............cm3

volume of carbon dioxide formed = .............cm3 [2]

(iv) Use the above volume ratio to find the mole ratio in the equation below and hence
find the formula of the hydrocarbon.

........CxHy(g) + ........O2(g) → ........CO2(g) + ........H2O(l)

hydrocarbon formula = ................................................ [2]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/M/J/11


11
For
(b) Alkanes are hydrocarbons and are generally unreactive. Their reactions include Examiner’s
combustion, substitution and cracking. Use

(i) Chlorine reacts with butane in a substitution reaction.

CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CH3 + Cl 2 → CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CH2 — Cl + HCl

Give the structural formula of another possible product of this reaction.

[1]

(ii) What is the essential condition for this reaction?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Explain what is meant by cracking. Give an example of a cracking reaction and
explain why the process is used.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [4]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/M/J/11


© UCLES 2011
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/32/M/J/11
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*0026964373*

CHEMISTRY 0620/33
Paper 3 (Extended) May/June 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


For Examiner’s Use
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
1
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 2

Total

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

IB11 06_0620_33/FP
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2
For
1 Choose an element from the list below which best fits the description. Examiner’s
Use
Rb Fe Si I P Sr

(a) An element which reacts with cold water. ............... [1]

(b) It is a solid at room temperature and exists as diatomic molecules, X2. ............... [1]

(c) It can form two oxides, XO and X2O3. ............... [1]

(d) This element has a hydride of the type XH3. ............... [1]

(e) It has a macromolecular structure similar to that of carbon. ............... [1]

[Total: 5]

2 Tin is an element in Group IV.

(a) The position of tin in the reactivity series is:

zinc
iron
tin
copper

(i) For each of the following, decide if a reaction would occur. If there is a reaction,
complete the equation, otherwise write ‘no reaction’.

Cu + Sn2+ → ..........................................

Fe + Sn2+ → ..........................................

Sn + Zn2+ → .......................................... [4]

(ii) Name the three products formed when tin(II) nitrate is heated.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Aqueous tin(II) sulfate is electrolysed using carbon electrodes. This electrolysis is similar
to that of aqueous copper(II) sulfate using carbon electrodes.

(i) What is the product at the negative electrode (cathode)?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Write the equation for the reaction at the positive electrode (anode).

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Name the acid formed in this electrolysis.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/M/J/11


3
For
(c) Steel articles can be plated with tin or zinc to prevent rusting. Examiner’s
When the zinc layer is damaged exposing the underlying steel, it does not rust, but when Use
the tin layer is broken the steel rusts. Explain.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/M/J/11 [Turn over


4
For
3 The equation for the reaction between sodium thiosulfate and hydrochloric acid is given Examiner’s
below. Use

Na2S2O3(aq) + 2HCl (aq) → 2NaCl (aq) + S(s) + SO2(g) + H2O(l)

The speed of this reaction was investigated using the following experiment. A beaker
containing 50 cm3 of 0.2 mol / dm3 sodium thiosulfate was placed on a black cross. 5.0 cm3 of
2.0 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid was added and the clock was started.

look down at
cross on paper

solution turns
from colourless sodium thiosulfate
to cloudy and hydrochloric acid

paper
cross on paper

view looking down

Initially the cross was clearly visible. When the solution became cloudy and the cross could
no longer be seen, the clock was stopped and the time recorded.

(a) The experiment was repeated with 25 cm3 of 0.2 mol / dm3 sodium thiosulfate and 25 cm3
of water. Typical results for this experiment and a further two experiments are given in
the table.

experiment 1 2 3 4

volume of thiosulfate / cm3 50 40 25 10


volume of water / cm3 0 10 25 40
volume of acid / cm3 5 5 5 5
total volume / cm3 55 55 55 55
time / s 48 60 96 ..........

(i) Explain why it is necessary to keep the total volume the same in all the
experiments.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Complete the table. [1]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/M/J/11


5
For
(iii) How and why does the speed of the reaction vary from experiment 1 to 4? Examiner’s
Use
....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) The idea of collisions between reacting particles is used to explain changes in the speed
of reactions. Use this idea to explain the following results.

volume of sodium thiosulfate / cm3 25 25


volume of water / cm3 25 25
volume of acid / cm3 5 5
temperature / °C 20 42
time / s 96 40

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/M/J/11 [Turn over


6
For
4 Iron is extracted from its ore, hematite, in the blast furnace. Examiner’s
Use
waste gases

raw materials
coke, C
iron ore, Fe2O3
firebrick lining limestone, CaCO3

air

slag

molten iron

Describe the reactions involved in this extraction. Include in your description an equation for
a redox reaction and one for an acid / base reaction.

..................................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................ [5]

[Total: 5]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/M/J/11


7
For
5 The diagram shows a simple cell. Examiner’s
Use
voltmeter
V

iron electrode zinc electrode

bubbles of
hydrogen dilute
sulfuric acid

(a) Write an equation for the overall reaction occurring in the cell.

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Explain why all cell reactions are exothermic and redox.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) Which electrode, zinc or iron, is the negative electrode? Give a reason for your choice.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Suggest two ways of increasing the voltage of this cell.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/M/J/11 [Turn over


8
For
6 (a) Methanol can be made from a mixture of carbon monoxide and hydrogen. Examiner’s
Use
CO(g) + 2H2(g) CH3OH(g)

The forward reaction is exothermic.

(i) Explain why the concentration of methanol at equilibrium does not change.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Suggest conditions, in terms of temperature and pressure, which would give a high
yield of methanol.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) How would the conditions used in practice compare with those given in (ii)? Give an
explanation of any differences.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Biodiesel is made from a vegetable oil by the following reaction.

C17H35 CO2 CH2 CH2OH

C17H35 CO2 CH + 3CH3OH → 3C17H35COOCH3 + CHOH

C17H35 CO2 CH2 CH2OH

vegetable oil methanol biodiesel glycerol

(i) What type of compound are vegetable oil and biodiesel?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) What other useful product is made from vegetable oil by heating it with aqueous
sodium hydroxide?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Suggest an explanation why making and using biodiesel has a smaller effect on
the percentage of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere than using petroleum-based
diesel.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/M/J/11


9
For
(c) Petroleum-based diesel is a mixture of hydrocarbons, such as octane and octene. Examiner’s
Use
(i) ‘Oct’ means eight carbon atoms per molecule. Draw a structural formula of an octene
molecule.

[1]

(ii) Describe a test which would distinguish between octane and octene.

test .............................................................................................................................

result with octane .......................................................................................................

result with octene ................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 14]

7 Chlorine reacts with phosphorus to form phosphorus trichloride.

(a) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in one molecule of
the covalent compound, phosphorus trichloride.
Use x to represent an electron from a phosphorus atom.
Use o to represent an electron from a chlorine atom.

[2]

(b) Phosphorus trichloride reacts with water to form two acids.

(i) Balance the equation for this reaction.

PCl 3 + .......H2O → .......HCl + H3PO3


[1]

(ii) Describe how you could show that phosphorus acid, H3PO3, is a weaker acid than
hydrochloric acid.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/M/J/11 [Turn over


10
For
(iii) Two salts of phosphorus acid are its sodium salt, which is soluble in water, and its Examiner’s
calcium salt which is insoluble in water. Suggest a method of preparation for each of Use
these salts from aqueous phosphorus acid. Specify any other reagent needed and
briefly outline the method.

sodium salt ................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

calcium salt ................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 10]

8 Hydrocarbons are compounds which contain only carbon and hydrogen.

(a) 20 cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon was burned in 120 cm3 of oxygen, which is in excess.
After cooling, the volume of the gases remaining was 90 cm3. Aqueous sodium hydroxide
was added to remove carbon dioxide, 30 cm3 of oxygen remained. All volumes were
measured at r.t.p..

(i) Explain why it is essential to use excess oxygen.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Carbon dioxide is slightly soluble in water. Why does it dissolve readily in the alkali,
sodium hydroxide?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Complete the following.

volume of gaseous hydrocarbon = ...............cm3

volume of oxygen used = .............cm3

volume of carbon dioxide formed = .............cm3 [2]

(iv) Use the above volume ratio to find the mole ratio in the equation below and hence
find the formula of the hydrocarbon.

........CxHy(g) + ........O2(g) → ........CO2(g) + ........H2O(l)

hydrocarbon formula = ................................................ [2]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/M/J/11


11
For
(b) Alkanes are hydrocarbons and are generally unreactive. Their reactions include Examiner’s
combustion, substitution and cracking. Use

(i) Chlorine reacts with butane in a substitution reaction.

CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CH3 + Cl 2 → CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CH2 — Cl + HCl

Give the structural formula of another possible product of this reaction.

[1]

(ii) What is the essential condition for this reaction?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Explain what is meant by cracking. Give an example of a cracking reaction and
explain why the process is used.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [4]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/M/J/11


© UCLES 2011
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/33/M/J/11
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*7023052942*

CHEMISTRY 0620/32
Paper 3 (Extended) May/June 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12. For Examiner’s Use

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 1
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 2

Total

This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB12 06_0620_32/3RP
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2
For
1 The table below includes information about some of the elements in Period 2. Examiner’s
Use

element carbon nitrogen fluorine neon


symbol C N F Ne
structure macromolecular simple simple single
molecules N2 molecules F2 atoms Ne
boiling point / °C 4200 –196 –188 –246

(a) Why does neon exist as single atoms but fluorine exists as molecules?

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) What determines the order of the elements in a period?

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) When liquid nitrogen boils the following change occurs.

N2(l) → N2(g)

The boiling point of nitrogen is very low even though the bond between the atoms in a
nitrogen molecule is very strong. Suggest an explanation.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the outer shell (valency) electrons in a
molecule of nitrogen.

[2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/M/J/12


3
For
2 Diamond and graphite are different forms of the same element, carbon. Examiner’s
Explain the following in terms of their structure. Use

(a) Graphite is a soft material which is used as a lubricant.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Diamond is a very hard material which is used for drilling and cutting.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Graphite is a good conductor of electricity and diamond is a poor conductor.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]

3 The uses of a substance are determined by its properties.

(a) Plastics are poor conductors of electricity. They are used as insulation for electric cables.
Which other two properties of plastics make them suitable for this purpose?

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Chromium is a hard, shiny metal. Suggest two reasons why chromium is used to
electroplate steel.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Why is aluminium used extensively in the manufacture of aeroplanes?

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/M/J/12 [Turn over


4
For
(d) Why is copper a suitable material from which to make cooking utensils? Examiner’s
Use
copper
cooking
utensil

food

heat

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(e) Describe the bonding in a typical metal.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 10]

4 The ore of aluminium is bauxite which is impure aluminium oxide. Alumina, pure aluminium
oxide, is obtained from bauxite.
Aluminium is formed at the cathode when a molten mixture of alumina and cryolite, Na3Al F6,
is electrolysed.

(a) (i) Name two products formed at the anode in this electrolysis.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) All the aluminium formed comes from the alumina not the cryolite.
Suggest two reasons why the electrolyte must contain cryolite.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) The major impurity in bauxite is iron(III) oxide. Iron(III) oxide is basic, aluminium
oxide is amphoteric. Explain how aqueous sodium hydroxide can be used to separate
them.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/M/J/12


5
For
(b) The purification of bauxite uses large amounts of sodium hydroxide. Examiner’s
Use
(i) Describe the chemistry of how sodium hydroxide is made from concentrated aqueous
sodium chloride. The description must include at least one ionic equation.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [5]

(ii) Making sodium hydroxide from sodium chloride produces two other chemicals.
Name these two chemicals and state one use of each chemical.

chemical ....................................................................................................................

use .............................................................................................................................

chemical ....................................................................................................................

use ....................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 13]

5 Islay is an island off the west coast of Scotland. The main industry on the island is making
ethanol from barley.

Barley contains the complex carbohydrate, starch. Enzymes catalyse the hydrolysis of starch
to a solution of glucose.

(a) (i) Draw the structure of the starch.


Glucose can be represented by HO OH

[2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/M/J/12 [Turn over


6
For
(ii) Enzymes can catalyse the hydrolysis of starch. Name another catalyst for this Examiner’s
reaction. Use

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Both starch and glucose are carbohydrates. Name the elements found in all
carbohydrates.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Yeast cells are added to the aqueous glucose. Fermentation produces a solution
containing up to 10 % of ethanol.

(i) Complete the word equation for the fermentation of glucose.

glucose → .......................... + ..........................


[1]

(ii) Explain why is it necessary to add yeast and suggest why the amount of yeast in the
mixture increases.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Fermentation is carried out at 35 °C. For many reactions a higher temperature would
give a faster reaction. Why is a higher temperature not used in this process?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) The organic waste, the residue of the barley and yeast, is disposed of through a pipeline
into the sea. In the future this waste will be converted into biogas by the anaerobic
respiration of bacteria. Biogas, which is mainly methane, will supply most of the island’s
energy.

(i) Anaerobic means in the absence of oxygen. Suggest an explanation why oxygen
must be absent.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) The obvious advantage of converting the waste into methane is economic.
Suggest two other advantages.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/M/J/12


7
For
6 A length of magnesium ribbon was added to 50 cm3 of sulfuric acid, concentration Examiner’s
1.0 mol / dm3. The time taken for the magnesium to react was measured. The experiment was Use
repeated with the same volume of different acids. In all these experiments, the acid was in
excess and the same length of magnesium ribbon was used.

(a)
concentration
experiment acid time / s
in mol / dm3

A sulfuric acid 1.0 20


B propanoic acid 0.5 230
C hydrochloric acid 1.0 40
D hydrochloric acid 0.5 80

(i) Write these experiments in order of reaction speed. Give the experiment with the
fastest speed first.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Give reasons for the order you have given in (i).

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [5]

(b) Suggest two changes to experiment C which would increase the speed of the reaction
and explain why the speed would increase. The volume of the acid, the concentration of
the acid and the mass of magnesium used were kept the same.

change 1 ...........................................................................................................................

explanation .......................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

change 2 ...........................................................................................................................

explanation .......................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [5]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/M/J/12 [Turn over


8
For
7 The alkenes are unsaturated hydrocarbons. They form a homologous series, the members of Examiner’s
which have similar chemical properties: Use

● easily oxidised
● addition reactions
● polymerisation
● combustion.

(a) All the alkenes have the same empirical formula.

(i) State their empirical formula.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Why is the empirical formula the same for all alkenes?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Alkenes can be oxidised to carboxylic acids by boiling with aqueous potassium
manganate(VII).

(i) Pent-2-ene, CH3–CH2–CH=CH–CH3, oxidises to CH3–CH2–COOH and CH3COOH.


Name these two acids.

CH3–CH2–COOH .......................................................................................................

CH3COOH ............................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) Most alkenes oxidise to two carboxylic acids. Deduce the formula of an alkene which
forms only one carboxylic acid.

[1]

(c) Complete the following equations for the addition reactions of propene.

(i) CH3–CH=CH2 + Br2 → .................................... [1]

(ii) CH3–CH=CH2 + H2O → .................................... [1]

(d) Draw the structural formula of poly(propene)

[2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/M/J/12


9
For
(e) 0.01 moles of an alkene needed 2.4 g of oxygen for complete combustion. 2.2 g of carbon Examiner’s
dioxide were formed. Determine the following mole ratio. Use

moles of alkene : moles of O2 : moles of CO2

From this ratio determine the formula of the alkene.

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

Write an equation for the complete combustion of this alkene.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 13]

8 Ethylamine, CH3–CH2–NH2, is a base which has similar properties to ammonia.

(a) In aqueous ethylamine, there is the following equilibrium.

CH3–CH2–NH2 + H2O CH3–CH2–NH3+ + OH–

Explain why water is behaving as an acid in this reaction.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Given aqueous solutions of ethylamine and sodium hydroxide, describe how you could
show that ethylamine is a weak base like ammonia and not a strong base like sodium
hydroxide.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) Ethylamine, like ammonia, reacts with acids to form salts.

CH3–CH2–NH2 + HCl → CH3–CH2–NH3Cl


ethylammonium chloride

Suggest how you could displace ethylamine from the salt, ethylammonium chloride.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/M/J/12 [Turn over


10
For
(d) Explain the chemistry of the following reaction: Examiner’s
Use
When aqueous ethylamine is added to aqueous iron(III) chloride, a brown precipitate is
formed.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/M/J/12


11

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/M/J/12


© UCLES 2012
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/32/M/J/12
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227

Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*2925136620*

CHEMISTRY 0620/33
Paper 3 (Extended) May/June 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12. For Examiner’s Use

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 1
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 2

Total

This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB12 06_0620_33/FP
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2
For
1 The table below includes information about some of the elements in Period 2. Examiner’s
Use

element carbon nitrogen fluorine neon


symbol C N F Ne
structure macromolecular simple simple single
molecules N2 molecules F2 atoms Ne
boiling point / °C 4200 –196 –188 –246

(a) Why does neon exist as single atoms but fluorine exists as molecules?

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) What determines the order of the elements in a period?

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) When liquid nitrogen boils the following change occurs.

N2(l) → N2(g)

The boiling point of nitrogen is very low even though the bond between the atoms in a
nitrogen molecule is very strong. Suggest an explanation.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the outer shell (valency) electrons in a
molecule of nitrogen.

[2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/M/J/12


3
For
2 Diamond and graphite are different forms of the same element, carbon. Examiner’s
Explain the following in terms of their structure. Use

(a) Graphite is a soft material which is used as a lubricant.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Diamond is a very hard material which is used for drilling and cutting.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Graphite is a good conductor of electricity and diamond is a poor conductor.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]

3 The uses of a substance are determined by its properties.

(a) Plastics are poor conductors of electricity. They are used as insulation for electric cables.
Which other two properties of plastics make them suitable for this purpose?

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Chromium is a hard, shiny metal. Suggest two reasons why chromium is used to
electroplate steel.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Why is aluminium used extensively in the manufacture of aeroplanes?

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/M/J/12 [Turn over


4
For
(d) Why is copper a suitable material from which to make cooking utensils? Examiner’s
Use
copper
cooking
utensil

food

heat

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(e) Describe the bonding in a typical metal.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 10]

4 The ore of aluminium is bauxite which is impure aluminium oxide. Alumina, pure aluminium
oxide, is obtained from bauxite.
Aluminium is formed at the cathode when a molten mixture of alumina and cryolite, Na3Al F6,
is electrolysed.

(a) (i) Name two products formed at the anode in this electrolysis.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) All the aluminium formed comes from the alumina not the cryolite.
Suggest two reasons why the electrolyte must contain cryolite.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) The major impurity in bauxite is iron(III) oxide. Iron(III) oxide is basic, aluminium
oxide is amphoteric. Explain how aqueous sodium hydroxide can be used to separate
them.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/M/J/12


5
For
(b) The purification of bauxite uses large amounts of sodium hydroxide. Examiner’s
Use
(i) Describe the chemistry of how sodium hydroxide is made from concentrated aqueous
sodium chloride. The description must include at least one ionic equation.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [5]

(ii) Making sodium hydroxide from sodium chloride produces two other chemicals.
Name these two chemicals and state one use of each chemical.

chemical ....................................................................................................................

use .............................................................................................................................

chemical ....................................................................................................................

use ....................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 13]

5 Islay is an island off the west coast of Scotland. The main industry on the island is making
ethanol from barley.

Barley contains the complex carbohydrate, starch. Enzymes catalyse the hydrolysis of starch
to a solution of glucose.

(a) (i) Draw the structure of the starch.


Glucose can be represented by HO OH

[2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/M/J/12 [Turn over


6
For
(ii) Enzymes can catalyse the hydrolysis of starch. Name another catalyst for this Examiner’s
reaction. Use

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Both starch and glucose are carbohydrates. Name the elements found in all
carbohydrates.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Yeast cells are added to the aqueous glucose. Fermentation produces a solution
containing up to 10 % of ethanol.

(i) Complete the word equation for the fermentation of glucose.

glucose → .......................... + ..........................


[1]

(ii) Explain why is it necessary to add yeast and suggest why the amount of yeast in the
mixture increases.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Fermentation is carried out at 35 °C. For many reactions a higher temperature would
give a faster reaction. Why is a higher temperature not used in this process?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) The organic waste, the residue of the barley and yeast, is disposed of through a pipeline
into the sea. In the future this waste will be converted into biogas by the anaerobic
respiration of bacteria. Biogas, which is mainly methane, will supply most of the island’s
energy.

(i) Anaerobic means in the absence of oxygen. Suggest an explanation why oxygen
must be absent.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) The obvious advantage of converting the waste into methane is economic.
Suggest two other advantages.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/M/J/12


7
For
6 A length of magnesium ribbon was added to 50 cm3 of sulfuric acid, concentration Examiner’s
1.0 mol / dm3. The time taken for the magnesium to react was measured. The experiment was Use
repeated with the same volume of different acids. In all these experiments, the acid was in
excess and the same length of magnesium ribbon was used.

(a)
concentration
experiment acid time / s
in mol / dm3

A sulfuric acid 1.0 20


B propanoic acid 0.5 230
C hydrochloric acid 1.0 40
D hydrochloric acid 0.5 80

(i) Write these experiments in order of reaction speed. Give the experiment with the
fastest speed first.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Give reasons for the order you have given in (i).

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [5]

(b) Suggest two changes to experiment C which would increase the speed of the reaction
and explain why the speed would increase. The volume of the acid, the concentration of
the acid and the mass of magnesium used were kept the same.

change 1 ...........................................................................................................................

explanation .......................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

change 2 ...........................................................................................................................

explanation .......................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [5]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/M/J/12 [Turn over


8
For
7 The alkenes are unsaturated hydrocarbons. They form a homologous series, the members of Examiner’s
which have similar chemical properties: Use

● easily oxidised
● addition reactions
● polymerisation
● combustion.

(a) All the alkenes have the same empirical formula.

(i) State their empirical formula.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Why is the empirical formula the same for all alkenes?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Alkenes can be oxidised to carboxylic acids by boiling with aqueous potassium
manganate(VII).

(i) Pent-2-ene, CH3–CH2–CH=CH–CH3, oxidises to CH3–CH2–COOH and CH3COOH.


Name these two acids.

CH3–CH2–COOH .......................................................................................................

CH3COOH ............................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) Most alkenes oxidise to two carboxylic acids. Deduce the formula of an alkene which
forms only one carboxylic acid.

[1]

(c) Complete the following equations for the addition reactions of propene.

(i) CH3–CH=CH2 + Br2 → .................................... [1]

(ii) CH3–CH=CH2 + H2O → .................................... [1]

(d) Draw the structural formula of poly(propene)

[2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/M/J/12


9
For
(e) 0.01 moles of an alkene needed 2.4 g of oxygen for complete combustion. 2.2 g of carbon Examiner’s
dioxide were formed. Determine the following mole ratio. Use

moles of alkene : moles of O2 : moles of CO2

From this ratio determine the formula of the alkene.

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

Write an equation for the complete combustion of this alkene.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 13]

8 Ethylamine, CH3–CH2–NH2, is a base which has similar properties to ammonia.

(a) In aqueous ethylamine, there is the following equilibrium.

CH3–CH2–NH2 + H2O CH3–CH2–NH3+ + OH–

Explain why water is behaving as an acid in this reaction.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Given aqueous solutions of ethylamine and sodium hydroxide, describe how you could
show that ethylamine is a weak base like ammonia and not a strong base like sodium
hydroxide.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) Ethylamine, like ammonia, reacts with acids to form salts.

CH3–CH2–NH2 + HCl → CH3–CH2–NH3Cl


ethylammonium chloride

Suggest how you could displace ethylamine from the salt, ethylammonium chloride.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/M/J/12 [Turn over


10
For
(d) Explain the chemistry of the following reaction: Examiner’s
Use
When aqueous ethylamine is added to aqueous iron(III) chloride, a brown precipitate is
formed.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/M/J/12


11

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/M/J/12


© UCLES 2012
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/33/M/J/12
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227

Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*2845008432*

CHEMISTRY 0620/31
Paper 3 (Extended) May/June 2013
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

IB13 06_0620_31/2RP
© UCLES 2013 [Turn over
2
For
1 Petroleum contains hydrocarbons which are separated by fractional distillation. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Complete the following definition of a hydrocarbon.

A hydrocarbon is a compound which .........................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Explain what is meant by the term fractional distillation.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Some of the fractions obtained from petroleum are given below.
State a use for each fraction.

bitumen ....................................................................

lubricating fraction ...................................................

paraffin fraction ........................................................

gasoline fraction ...................................................... [4]

[Total: 8]

2 An element, M, has the electron distribution 2 + 8 + 18 + 3.

(a) Which group in the Periodic Table is element M likely to be in?

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Predict whether element M is a poor or a good conductor of electricity.


Give a reason for your answer.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Binary compounds contain two atoms per molecule, for example HCl.
Identify an element which could form a binary compound with element M.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) Predict the formula of the sulfate of M. The formula of the sulfate ion is SO42–.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2013 0620/31/M/J/13


3
For
(e) The hydroxide of M is a white powder which is insoluble in water. Examiner’s
Describe how you could show that this hydroxide is amphoteric. Use

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]

3 A small piece of marble, CaCO3, was added to 5.0 cm3 of hydrochloric acid, concentration
1.0 mol / dm3, at 25 °C. The time taken for the reaction to stop was measured. The experiment
was repeated using 5.0 cm3 of different solutions of acids. The acid was in excess in all of the
experiments.

Typical results are given in the table.

experiment temperature / °C acid solution time / min


1 25 hydrochloric acid 1.0 mol / dm3 3
2 25 hydrochloric acid 0.5 mol / dm3 7
3 25 ethanoic acid 1.0 mol / dm3 10
4 15 hydrochloric acid 1.0 mol / dm3 8

(a) (i) Explain why it is important that the pieces of marble are the same size and the same
shape.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) How would you know when the reaction had stopped?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) The equation for the reaction in experiment 1 is:

CaCO3(s) + 2HCl (aq) → CaCl 2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)

Complete the following ionic equation.

CaCO3(s) + 2H+(aq) → ............ + ............ + ............


[1]

© UCLES 2013 0620/31/M/J/13 [Turn over


4
For
(c) (i) Explain why the reaction in experiment 1 is faster than the reaction in experiment 2. Examiner’s
Use
....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) The acids used for experiment 1 and experiment 3 have the same concentration.
Explain why experiment 3 is slower than experiment 1.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Explain in terms of collisions between reacting particles why experiment 4 is slower
than experiment 1.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 10]

4 The structural formula of cyclohexane is drawn below.

CH2
H 2C CH2

H 2C CH2
CH2

(a) The name gives information about the structure of the compound.
Hex because there are six carbon atoms and cyclo because they are joined in a ring.
What information about the structure of this compound is given by the ending ane?

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) What are the molecular and empirical formulae of cyclohexane?

molecular formula .............................

empirical formula .............................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 0620/31/M/J/13


5
For
(c) Draw the structural formula of cyclobutane. Examiner’s
Use

[1]

(d) (i) Deduce the molecular formula of hexene.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Explain why cyclohexane and the alkene, hexene, are isomers.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(e) Describe a test which would distinguish between cyclohexane and the unsaturated
hydrocarbon hexene.

test ....................................................................................................................................

result of test with cyclohexane ..........................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

result of test with hexene ..................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2013 0620/31/M/J/13 [Turn over


6
For
5 The reactivity series shows the metals in order of reactivity. Examiner’s
Use
(a) The reactivity series can be established using displacement reactions. A piece of zinc is
added to aqueous lead nitrate. The zinc becomes coated with a black deposit of lead.

Zn + Pb2+ → Zn2+ + Pb

Zinc is more reactive than lead.

The reactivity series can be written as a list of ionic equations.

...... → ...... + ...... most reactive metal : the best reductant (reducing agent)
Zn → Zn2+ + 2e–
Fe → Fe2+ + 2e–
Pb → Pb2+ + 2e–
Cu → Cu2+ + 2e–
Ag → Ag+ + e–

(i) In the space at the top of the list, write an ionic equation for a metal which is more
reactive than zinc. [1]

(ii) Write an ionic equation for the reaction between aqueous silver(I) nitrate and zinc.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Explain why the positive ions are likely to be oxidants (oxidising agents).

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) Deduce which ion is the best oxidant (oxidising agent).

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(v) Which ion(s) in the list can oxidise lead metal?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2013 0620/31/M/J/13


7
For
(b) A reactivity series can also be established by measuring the voltage of simple cells. The Examiner’s
diagram shows a simple cell. Use

voltmeter
V

cadmium copper
electrode electrode

sulfuric acid

Results from cells using the metals tin, cadmium, zinc and copper are given in the table
below.

electrode 1 electrode 2
cell voltage / volts
positive electrode negative electrode

1 copper cadmium 0.74


2 copper tin 0.48
3 copper zinc 1.10

Write the four metals in order of increasing reactivity and explain how you used the data
in the table to determine this order.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 9]

6 Ammonia is a compound which only contains the elements nitrogen and hydrogen. It is a
weak base.

(a) (i) Define the term base.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Given aqueous solutions of ammonia and sodium hydroxide, both having a
concentration of 0.1 mol / dm3, how could you show that ammonia is the weaker
base?

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 0620/31/M/J/13 [Turn over


8
For
(b) Ammonia is manufactured by the Haber Process. The economics of this process require Examiner’s
that as much ammonia as possible is made as quickly as possible. Use
Explain how this can be done using the following information.

The conditions for the following reversible reaction are:

● 450 °C
● 200 atmospheres pressure
● iron catalyst

N2(g) + 3H2(g) 2NH3(g) the reaction is exothermic

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [5]

(c) Another compound which contains only nitrogen and hydrogen is hydrazine, N2H4.

Complete the equation for the preparation of hydrazine from ammonia.

.....NH3 + NaCl O → N2H4 + ............ + H2O [2]

(d) The structural formula of hydrazine is given below.

H H

N N

H H

Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in one molecule of
the covalent compound hydrazine.
Use x to represent an electron from a nitrogen atom.
Use o to represent an electron from a hydrogen atom.

[3]

© UCLES 2013 0620/31/M/J/13


9
For
(e) Hydrazine is a weak base and it removes dissolved oxygen from water. It is added to Examiner’s
water in steel boilers to prevent rusting. Use

(i) One way it reduces the rate of rusting is by changing the pH of water.
What effect would hydrazine have on the pH of water?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Give a reason, other than pH, why hydrazine reduces the rate of rusting.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 15]

7 The hydroxides of the Group I metals are soluble in water. Most other metal hydroxides are
insoluble in water.

(a) (i) Crystals of lithium chloride can be prepared from lithium hydroxide by titration.

burette filled with


hydrochloric acid of
concentration 2.20 mol / dm3

conical flask

25.0 cm3 of aqueous lithium hydroxide


and indicator

25.0 cm3 of aqueous lithium hydroxide is pipetted into the conical flask.
A few drops of an indicator are added. Dilute hydrochloric acid is added slowly to the
alkali until the indicator just changes colour. The volume of acid needed to neutralise
the lithium hydroxide is noted.

A neutral solution of lithium chloride, which still contains the indicator, is left. Describe
how you could obtain a neutral solution of lithium chloride which does not contain an
indicator.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 0620/31/M/J/13 [Turn over


10
For
(ii) You cannot prepare a neutral solution of magnesium chloride by the same method. Examiner’s
Describe how you could prepare a neutral solution of magnesium chloride. Use

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) The concentration of the hydrochloric acid was 2.20 mol / dm3. The volume of acid needed
to neutralise the 25.0 cm3 of lithium hydroxide was 20.0 cm3. Calculate the concentration
of the aqueous lithium hydroxide.

LiOH + HCl → LiCl + H2O

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Lithium chloride forms three hydrates. They are LiCl.H2O, LiCl.2H2O and LiCl.3H2O.
Which one of these three hydrates contains 45.9 % of water?
Show how you arrived at your answer.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 10]

8 There are three types of giant structure - ionic, metallic and giant covalent.

(a) In an ionic compound, the ions are held in a lattice by strong forces.

(i) Explain the term lattice.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Explain how the ions are held together by strong forces.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2013 0620/31/M/J/13


11
For
(b) Describe the bonding in a typical metal. Examiner’s
Use
...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) The electrical conductivities of the three types of giant structure are given in the following
table.

type of structure conductivity of solid conductivity of liquid

ionic poor good


metallic good good
giant covalent poor poor

Explain the differences in electrical conductivity between the three types of giant structure
and the difference, if any, between the solid and liquid states of the same structure.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [5]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2013 0620/31/M/J/13 [Turn over


© UCLES 2013
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/31/M/J/13
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227

Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*0737818166*

CHEMISTRY 0620/32
Paper 3 (Extended) May/June 2013
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

IB13 06_0620_32/2RP
© UCLES 2013 [Turn over
2
For
1 Air is a mixture of gases. The main constituents are the elements oxygen and nitrogen. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Name another element in air.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Give the formula of a compound in unpolluted air.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Common pollutants present in air are the oxides of nitrogen and sulfur dioxide.

(i) How are the oxides of nitrogen formed?

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) How is sulfur dioxide formed?

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) These oxides are largely responsible for acid rain.


State two harmful effects of acid rain.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 0620/32/M/J/13


3
For
(c) The percentage of oxygen in air can be determined by the following experiment. Examiner’s
Use
large pile of small pile
copper of copper

gas syringe gas syringe


heat
containing
50 cm3 of air

The gas syringe contains 50 cm3 of air. The large pile of copper is heated and the air is
passed from one gas syringe to the other over the hot copper. The large pile of copper
turns black. The gas is allowed to cool and its volume measured.

The small pile of copper is heated and the remaining gas passed over the hot copper.
The copper does not turn black. The final volume of gas left in the apparatus is less
than 50 cm3.

(i) Explain why the copper in the large pile turns black.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Why must the gas be allowed to cool before its volume is measured?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Explain why the copper in the small pile did not turn black.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) What is the approximate volume of the gas left in the apparatus?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2013 0620/32/M/J/13 [Turn over


4
For
2 (a) The table below gives the number of protons, neutrons and electrons in atoms or ions. Examiner’s
Complete the table. The first line is given as an example. Use
You will need to use the Periodic Table.

number of number of number of symbol or


particle
protons electrons neutrons formula

A 4 4 5 9
4 Be

B 19 18 20
....................

C 30 30 35
....................

D 8 10 8
....................

E 31 31 39
....................

[6]

(b) Using the data in the table, explain how you can determine whether a particle is an atom,
a negative ion or a positive ion.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 9]

3 The diagram shows some of the processes which determine the percentage of carbon dioxide
in the atmosphere.

carbon dioxide
in atmosphere

combustion respiration photosynthesis

(a) Explain how the following two processes alter the percentage of carbon dioxide in the
atmosphere.

(i) combustion

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2013 0620/32/M/J/13


5
For
(ii) respiration Examiner’s
Use
....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) Photosynthesis reduces the percentage of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere.

(i) Complete the word equation for photosynthesis.

carbon dioxide + water → ........................ + ........................ [2]

(ii) State two essential conditions for the above reaction to occur.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 10]

4 At present the most important method of manufacturing hydrogen is steam reforming of


methane.

(a) In the first stage of the process, methane reacts with steam at 800 °C.

CH4(g) + H2O(g) 3H2(g) + CO(g)

In the second stage of the process, carbon monoxide reacts with steam at 200 °C.

CO(g) + H2O(g) CO2(g) + H2(g)

(i) Explain why the position of equilibrium in the first reaction is affected by pressure but
the position of equilibrium in the second reaction is not.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Suggest why a high temperature is needed in the first reaction to get a high yield of
products but in the second reaction a high yield is obtained at a low temperature.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 0620/32/M/J/13 [Turn over


6
For
(b) Two other ways of producing hydrogen are cracking and electrolysis. Examiner’s
Use
(i) Hydrogen can be a product of the cracking of long chain alkanes.
Complete the equation for the cracking of C8H18.

C8H18 → 2............ + H2 [1]

(ii) There are three products of the electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium
chloride. Hydrogen is one of them.
Write an equation for the electrode reaction which forms hydrogen.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Name the other two products of the electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium
chloride and give a use of each one.

product ............................................ use ............................................

product ............................................ use ............................................ [4]

[Total: 11]

5 Many monomer molecules react together to form one molecule of a polymer. This reaction is
called polymerisation.

(a) The structural formula of the polymer, poly(chloroethene), is given below. This polymer
is also known as PVC.

H H

C C

H Cl n

(i) A major use of PVC is insulation of electric cables. PVC is a poor conductor of
electricity.
Suggest another property which makes it suitable for this use.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) One way of disposing of waste PVC is by burning it. This method has the disadvantage
that poisonous gases are formed.
Suggest two poisonous gases which could be formed by the combustion of PVC.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 0620/32/M/J/13


7
For
(b) (i) Deduce the structural formula of the monomer from that of the polymer. Examiner’s
Use
H CH3

C C

H H n

structural formula of monomer

[1]

(ii) Deduce the structural formula of the polymer, poly(phenylethene), from the formula
of its monomer, phenylethene.

C 6H 5 H

C C

H H

structural formula of polymer

[2]

© UCLES 2013 0620/32/M/J/13 [Turn over


8
For
(c) The carbohydrate, glucose, polymerises to form the more complex carbohydrate starch. Examiner’s
Use
If glucose is represented by

HO OH

then the structural formula of starch is as drawn below.

O O

How does the polymerisation of glucose differ from that of an alkene such as phenylethene?

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

6 Aluminium is an important metal with a wide range of uses.

(a) Aluminium is obtained by the electrolysis of aluminium oxide dissolved in molten cryolite.

waste gases

oxygen given off


at carbon anode (+)

molten mixture of
carbon cathode (–)
aluminium oxide and cryolite

aluminium

(i) Solid aluminium oxide is a poor conductor of electricity. It conducts either when
molten or when dissolved in molten cryolite. Explain why.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Why is a solution of aluminium oxide in molten cryolite used rather than molten
aluminium oxide?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2013 0620/32/M/J/13


9
For
(iii) Explain why the carbon anodes need to be replaced periodically. Examiner’s
Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) One reason why graphite is used for the electrodes is that it is a good conductor of
electricity. Give another reason.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Aluminium is used to make food containers because it resists corrosion.


Explain why it is not attacked by the acids in food.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Aluminium is used for overhead power (electricity) cables which usually have a steel
core.

aluminium

steel core

(i) Give two properties of aluminium which make it suitable for this use.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Explain why the cables have a steel core.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2013 0620/32/M/J/13 [Turn over


10
For
7 The ester linkage showing all the bonds is drawn as Examiner’s
Use
O

or more simply it can be written as –COO–.

(a) (i) Give the structural formula of the ester ethyl ethanoate.

[1]

(ii) Deduce the name of the ester formed from methanoic acid and butanol.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) (i) Which group of naturally occurring compounds contains the ester linkage?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Draw the structural formula of the polyester formed from the following monomers.

HOOCC6H4COOH and HOCH2CH2OH

You are advised to use the simpler form of the ester linkage.

[3]

© UCLES 2013 0620/32/M/J/13


11
For
(c) Esters can be used as solvents in chromatography. The following shows a chromatogram Examiner’s
of plant acids. Use

solvent front

the cross represents


the centre of the spot

baseline
sample 1 sample 2

An ester was used as the solvent and the chromatogram was sprayed with bromothymol
blue.

(i) Suggest why it was necessary to spray the chromatogram.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Explain what is meant by the Rf value of a sample.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2013 0620/32/M/J/13 [Turn over


12
For
(iii) Calculate the Rf values of the two samples and use the data in the table to identify Examiner’s
the plant acids. Use

plant acid Rf value

tartaric acid 0.22


citric acid 0.30
oxalic acid 0.36
malic acid 0.46
succinic acid 0.60

sample 1 Rf = ................ It is ..................... acid.

sample 2 Rf = ................ It is ..................... acid. [2]

[Total: 11]

8 (a) Define the following

(i) the mole

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) the Avogadro constant

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Which two of the following contain the same number of molecules?
Show how you arrived at your answer.

2.0 g of methane, CH4


8.0 g of oxygen, O2
2.0 g of ozone, O3
8.0 g of sulfur dioxide, SO2

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2013 0620/32/M/J/13


13
For
(c) 4.8 g of calcium is added to 3.6 g of water. The following reaction occurs. Examiner’s
Use
Ca + 2H2O → Ca(OH)2 + H2

(i) the number of moles of Ca = ....................

the number of moles of H2O = .................... [1]

(ii) Which reagent is in excess? Explain your choice.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Calculate the mass of the reagent named in (ii) which remained at the end of the
experiment.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2013 0620/32/M/J/13 [Turn over


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2013 0620/32/M/J/13


15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2013 0620/32/M/J/13


© UCLES 2013
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/32/M/J/13
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227

Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*6258911381*

CHEMISTRY 0620/33
Paper 3 (Extended) May/June 2013
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB13 06_0620_33/2RP
© UCLES 2013 [Turn over
2
For
1 Substances can be classified as: Examiner’s
Use
elements mixtures compounds

Elements can be divided into:

metals non-metals

(a) Define each of the following terms.

(i) element

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) compound

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) mixture

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Classify each of the following as either an element, compound or mixture.

(i) brass .................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) carbon dioxide ..................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) copper .................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Which physical property is used to distinguish between metals and non-metals?
It is possessed by all metals but by only one non-metal.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2013 0620/33/M/J/13


3
For
2 One of the factors which determine the reaction rate of solids is particle size. Examiner’s
Use
(a) A mixture of finely powdered aluminium and air may explode when ignited.
An explosion is a very fast exothermic reaction. This causes a large and sudden increase
in temperature.

Explain each of the following in terms of collisions between reacting particles.

(i) Why is the reaction between finely powdered aluminium and air very fast?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Explain why for most reactions the rate of reaction decreases with time.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Suggest an explanation why the rate of reaction in an explosion could increase
rather than decrease with time.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) (i) Give another example of a substance other than a metal which, when finely
powdered, might explode when ignited in air.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Describe a simple test-tube reaction which shows the effect of particle size on the
rate at which a solid reacts with a solution.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2013 0620/33/M/J/13 [Turn over


4
For
3 Iron from the blast furnace is impure. It contains 5% of impurities, mainly carbon, sulfur, Examiner’s
silicon and phosphorus. Almost all of this impure iron is converted into the alloy, mild steel. Use

(a) (i) State a use of mild steel.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Name and give a use of another iron-containing alloy.

name ..........................................................................................................................

use ....................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) The oxides of carbon and sulfur are gases. The oxides of silicon and phosphorus are not.
Explain how these impurities are removed from the impure iron when it is converted into
mild steel.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [5]

[Total: 8]

4 Germanium is an element in Group IV. The electron distribution of a germanium atom is


2 + 8 + 18 + 4. It has oxidation states of +2 and +4.

(a) Germanium forms a series of saturated hydrides similar to the alkanes.

(i) Draw the structural formula of the hydride which contains three germanium atoms
per molecule.

[1]

(ii) Predict the general formula of the germanium hydrides.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2013 0620/33/M/J/13


5
For
(b) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in one molecule of Examiner’s
the covalent compound germanium(IV) chloride, GeCl 4. Use

Use o to represent an electron from a chlorine atom.


Use x to represent an electron from a germanium atom.

[2]

(c) Describe the structure of the giant covalent compound germanium(IV) oxide, GeO2.
It has a similar structure to that of silicon(IV) oxide.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(d) Is the change GeCl 2 to GeCl 4 reduction, oxidation or neither? Give a reason for your
choice.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 9]

5 All metal nitrates decompose when heated. A few form a nitrite and oxygen. Most form the
metal oxide, oxygen and a brown gas called nitrogen dioxide.

(a) (i) Name a metal whose nitrate decomposes to form the metal nitrite and oxygen.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Complete the equation for the action of heat on lead(II) nitrate.

......Pb(NO3)2 → ......... + ......NO2 + O2 [2]

(iii) Suggest why the nitrate of the metal, named in (a)(i), decomposes less readily than
lead(II) nitrate.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 0620/33/M/J/13 [Turn over


6
For
(b) Almost all samples of nitrogen dioxide are an equilibrium mixture of nitrogen dioxide, Examiner’s
NO2, and dinitrogen tetroxide, N2O4. Use

forward reaction
2NO2(g) N2O4(g)
reverse reaction
dark brown colourless

In the forward reaction, a bond forms between the two nitrogen dioxide molecules.

NO2 + NO2 → O2N – NO2

(i) Explain the term equilibrium mixture.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) The syringe contains a sample of the equilibrium mixture. The plunger was pulled
back reducing the pressure.
How would the colour of the gas inside the syringe change? Give an explanation for
your answer.

equilibrium mixture

sealed end

gas syringe

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(iii) A sealed tube containing an equilibrium mixture of nitrogen dioxide and dinitrogen
tetroxide was placed in a beaker of ice cold water.
The colour of the mixture changed from brown to pale yellow.

Is the forward reaction exothermic or endothermic? Give an explanation for your


choice.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iv) What other piece of information given in the equation supports your answer to (iii)?

NO2 + NO2 → O2N–NO2

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2013 0620/33/M/J/13


7
For
6 Sulfuric acid and malonic acid are both dibasic acids. One mole of a dibasic acid can form Examiner’s
two moles of hydrogen ions. Use

H2SO4 → 2H+ + SO42–

Dibasic acids can form salts of the type Na2X and CaX.

(a) Malonic acid is a white crystalline solid which is soluble in water. It melts at 135 °C.
The structural formula of malonic acid is given below. It forms salts called malonates.

CH2(COOH)2 or HOOC – CH2 – COOH

(i) How could you determine if a sample of malonic acid is pure?

technique used ..........................................................................................................

result if pure ......................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) What is the molecular formula of malonic acid?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) When malonic acid is heated there are two products, carbon dioxide and a simpler
carboxylic acid. Deduce the name and molecular formula of this acid.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iv) Malonic acid reacts with ethanol to form a colourless liquid which has a ‘fruity’ smell.
Its structural formula is given below.

O O

C CH2 C

CH3 CH2 O O CH2 CH3

What type of compound contains the group which is circled?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2013 0620/33/M/J/13 [Turn over


8
For
(b) (i) Suggest why a solution of malonic acid, concentration 0.2 mol / dm3, has a higher pH Examiner’s
than one of sulfuric acid of the same concentration. Use

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Describe a test, other than measuring pH, which can be carried out on both acid
solutions to confirm the explanation given in (b)(i) for the different pH values of the
two acids.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Complete the following equations for reactions of these two acids.

(i) sodium hydroxide + malonic acid → .................... + .................... [1]

....................

(ii) CuO + H2SO4 → .................... + .................... [2]

(iii) Mg + CH2(COOH)2 → .................... + .................... [2]

(iv) K2CO3 + H2SO4 → .................... + .................... + .................... [2]

[Total: 16]

7 Alkanes and alkenes are both series of hydrocarbons.

(a) (i) Explain the term hydrocarbon.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) What is the difference between these two series of hydrocarbons?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Alkenes and simpler alkanes are made from long-chain alkanes by cracking.
Complete the following equation for the cracking of the alkane C20H42.

C20H42 → 2C4H8 + 2C2H4 + ............... [1]

© UCLES 2013 0620/33/M/J/13


9
For
(c) Alkenes such as butene and ethene are more reactive than alkanes. Examiner’s
Alkenes are used in the petrochemical industry to make a range of products, which Use
includes polymers and alcohols.

(i) Dibromoethane is used as a pesticide. Complete the equation for its preparation
from ethene.

H H

C C + Br2 →

H H
[1]

(ii) The structural formula of a poly(alkene) is given below.

CH3 CH3

C C

H H n

Deduce the structural formula of its monomer.

[2]

(iii) How is butanol made from butene, CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2? Include an equation in
your answer.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iv) Cracking changes alkanes into alkenes. How could an alkene be converted into an
alkane? Include an equation in your answer.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 0620/33/M/J/13 [Turn over


10
For
(d) 20 cm3 of a hydrocarbon was burnt in 175 cm3 of oxygen. After cooling, the volume of Examiner’s
the remaining gases was 125 cm3. The addition of aqueous sodium hydroxide removed Use
carbon dioxide leaving 25 cm3 of unreacted oxygen.

(i) volume of oxygen used = .......... cm3 [1]

(ii) volume of carbon dioxide formed = .......... cm3 [1]

(iii) Deduce the formula of the hydrocarbon and the balanced equation for the reaction.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2013 0620/33/M/J/13


11

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2013 0620/33/M/J/13


© UCLES 2013
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/33/M/J/13
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227

Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*4182021420*

CHEMISTRY 0620/33
Paper 3 (Extended) May/June 2014
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

IB14 06_0620_33/2RP
© UCLES 2014 [Turn over
2

1 Choose a gas from the following list to answer the questions below. Each gas may be used once,
more than once or not at all.

ammonia carbon dioxide carbon monoxide fluorine

hydrogen krypton nitrogen propene sulfur dioxide

(a) It is a product of respiration. ................................................................................................ [1]

(b) It polymerises to form a poly(alkene). .................................................................................. [1]

(c) It is a noble gas. .................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) It is the main component of air. ............................................................................................ [1]

(e) It is a very reactive non-metal. ............................................................................................. [1]

(f) It is used to kill micro-organisms in fruit juice. ..................................................................... [1]

(g) It burns to form water as the only product. .......................................................................... [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/M/J/14


3

2 Explain each of the following in terms of the kinetic particle theory.

(a) The rate of most reactions increases at higher temperatures.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) A liquid has a fixed volume but takes up the shape of the container. A gas takes up the shape
of the container but it does not have a fixed volume.

liquid gas

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/M/J/14 [Turn over


4

3 (a) Biological catalysts produced by microbes cause food to deteriorate and decay.

(i) What is the name of these biological catalysts?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Freezing does not kill the microbes.


Suggest why freezing is still a very effective way of preserving food.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Pea seeds grow in pods on pea plants.

Freshly picked pea seeds contain a sugar. The sugar can form a polymer.
Give the structural formula of the polymer and name the other product of this polymerisation
reaction.
You may represent the sugar by the formula:

HO OH

structural formula of the polymer

other product ....................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/M/J/14


5

(c) Describe how the pea plant makes a sugar such as glucose.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 9]

4 Iron from a blast furnace contains about 5% of the impurities – carbon, silicon, phosphorus and sulfur.
Most of this impure iron is used to make steels, such as mild steel, and a very small percentage is
used to make pure iron.

(a) Calcium oxide and oxygen are used to remove the impurities from the iron produced in the
blast furnace.

(i) State how these chemicals are manufactured.

calcium oxide ......................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

oxygen ................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................
[3]

(ii) Describe how these two chemicals remove the four impurities. Include at least one equation
in your answer.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [5]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/M/J/14 [Turn over


6

(b) (i) Describe the structure of a typical metal such as iron. You may include a diagram.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

[2]

(ii) Explain why pure iron is malleable.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) Mild steel is an alloy of iron and carbon.


Suggest why mild steel is harder than pure iron.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/M/J/14


7

5 Ammonia is made by the Haber process.

N2(g) + 3H2(g) 2NH3(g)

The forward reaction is exothermic.


The conditions in the reaction chamber are:

● a pressure of 200 atmospheres,


● a catalyst of finely divided iron,
● a temperature of 400 to 450 °C.

(a) What are the two advantages of using a high pressure? Give a reason for both.

advantage 1 ...............................................................................................................................

reason ........................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

advantage 2 ...............................................................................................................................

reason ........................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................
[4]

(b) A higher temperature would give a faster reaction rate.


Why is a higher temperature not used?

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(c) (i) Why is the iron catalyst used as a fine powder?

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Give two reasons why a catalyst is used.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/M/J/14 [Turn over


8

(d) The equilibrium mixture leaving the reaction chamber contains 15% ammonia. Suggest how
the ammonia could be separated from the mixture.

boiling point / °C
hydrogen –253
nitrogen –196
ammonia –33

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(e) Ammonia is used to make nitrogen trifluoride, NF3.


Nitrogen trifluoride is essential to the electronics industry. It is made by the following reaction.

F F H F
H N H + F F → F N F + H F
F F H F
H F

Determine if the above reaction is exothermic or endothermic using the following bond energies
and by completing the following table. The first line has been done as an example.
Bond energy is the amount of energy, in kJ / mole, needed to break or make one mole of the
bond.

bond bond energy in kJ / mole


N–H 390
F–F 155
N–F 280
H–F 565

bond energy change / kJ


N–H (3 × 390) = 1170
F–F
N–F
H–F

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [4]

[Total: 16]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/M/J/14


9

6 The alkanes are a family of saturated hydrocarbons. Their reactions include combustion, cracking
and substitution.

(a) (i) What is meant by the term hydrocarbon?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) What is meant by the term saturated ?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) (i) What is the general formula for the homologous series of alkanes?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Calculate the mass of one mole of an alkane with 14 carbon atoms.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) The complete combustion of hydrocarbons produces carbon dioxide and water only.

(i) Write the equation for the complete combustion of nonane, C9H20.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) 20 cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon was mixed with an excess of oxygen, 200 cm3. The
mixture was ignited. After cooling, 40 cm3 of oxygen and 100 cm3 of carbon dioxide
remained. Deduce the formula of the hydrocarbon and the equation for its combustion. All
volumes were measured at r.t.p..

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/M/J/14 [Turn over


10

(d) Cracking is used to obtain short-chain alkanes, alkenes and hydrogen from long-chain alkanes.

(i) Give a use for each of the three products listed above.

short-chain alkanes ............................................................................................................

alkenes ...............................................................................................................................

hydrogen ....................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Write an equation for the cracking of decane, C10H22, which produces two different alkenes
and hydrogen as the only products.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(e) Chlorine reacts with propane in a substitution reaction to form 1-chloropropane.

CH3 – CH2 – CH3 + Cl 2 → CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – Cl + HCl

(i) What is the essential condition for the above reaction?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) There is more than one possible substitution reaction between chlorine and propane.
Suggest the structural formula of a different product.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 16]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/M/J/14


11

7 Aluminium is obtained from purified alumina, Al 2O3, by electrolysis.

(a) Alumina is obtained from the main ore of aluminium.


State the name of this ore.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Describe the extraction of aluminium from alumina. Include the electrolyte, the electrodes and
the reactions at the electrodes.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [6]

(c) Aluminium is resistant to corrosion. It is protected by an oxide layer on its surface.


The thickness of this oxide layer can be increased by anodising.

(i) State a use of aluminium due to its resistance to corrosion.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Anodising is an electrolytic process. Dilute sulfuric acid is electrolysed with an aluminium
object as the anode. The thickness of the oxide layer is increased. Complete the equations
for the reactions at the aluminium anode.

.......OH– → O2 + 2H2O + ......e–

....Al + ......... → ......... Al 2O3 [4]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/M/J/14 [Turn over


© UCLES 2014
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/33/M/J/14
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.


133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*1045436086*

CHEMISTRY 0620/31
Paper 3 (Extended) May/June 2015
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

IB15 06_0620_31/FP
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
2

1 (a) Coal is a solid fossil fuel.

Name two other fossil fuels.

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Two of the elements present in a sample of coal are carbon and sulfur.

A sample of coal was heated in the absence of air and the products included water, ammonia
and hydrocarbons.

Name three other elements present in this sample of coal.

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Sulfur, present in coal, is one major cause of acid rain. Sulfur burns to form sulfur dioxide which
reacts with rain water to form sulfuric acid.

(i) Describe how the high temperatures in vehicle engines are another cause of acid rain.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Give two harmful effects of acid rain.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) In 2010, a large coal-burning power station in the UK was converted to burn both coal and
wood.

Explain why the combustion of wood rather than coal can reduce the effect of the emissions
from this power station on the level of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/M/J/15


3

2 Iron from the Blast Furnace is impure. It contains about 5% of impurities, mainly carbon, sulfur,
silicon and phosphorus, which have to be removed when this iron is converted into steel.

(a) Explain how the addition of oxygen and calcium oxide removes these impurities. Include an
equation for a reaction of oxygen and a word equation for a reaction of calcium oxide in this
process.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................
[5]

(b) Mild steel is the most common form of steel. Mild steel contains a maximum of 0.3% of carbon.

High carbon steel contains 2% of carbon. It is less malleable and much harder than mild steel.

(i) Give a use of mild steel.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Suggest a use of high carbon steel.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Explain why metals are malleable.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(iv) Suggest an explanation why high carbon steel is less malleable and harder than mild
steel.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/M/J/15 [Turn over


4

3 (a) The reactions between metals and acids are redox reactions.

Zn + 2H+ → Zn2+ + H2

(i) Which change in the above reaction is oxidation, Zn to Zn2+ or 2H+ to H2? Give a reason
for your choice.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Which reactant in the above reaction is the oxidising agent? Give a reason for your choice.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) The rate of reaction between a metal and an acid can be investigated using the apparatus
shown below.

20 40 60 80 100

gas syringe

hydrochloric acid

zinc foil

A piece of zinc foil was added to 50 cm3 of hydrochloric acid, of concentration 2.0 mol / dm3. The
acid was in excess. The hydrogen evolved was collected in the gas syringe and its volume
measured every minute. The results were plotted and labelled as graph 1.

graph 2 (with copper)

graph 1
volume

0
0 time

The experiment was repeated to show that the reaction between zinc metal and hydrochloric
acid is catalysed by copper. A small volume of aqueous copper(II) chloride was added to the
acid before the zinc was added. The results of this experiment were plotted on the same grid
and labelled as graph 2.

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/M/J/15


5

(i) Explain why the reaction mixture in the second experiment contains copper metal. Include
an equation in your explanation.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain how graph 2 shows that copper catalyses the reaction.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) If the first experiment was repeated using ethanoic acid, CH3COOH, instead of hydrochloric
acid, how and why would the graph be different from graph 1?

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(d) Calculate the maximum mass of zinc which will react with 50 cm3 of hydrochloric acid, of
concentration 2.0 mol / dm3.

Zn + 2HCl → ZnCl 2 + H2

Show your working.

[3]

[Total: 16]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/M/J/15 [Turn over


6

4 The alcohols form a homologous series.

(a) (i) Give three characteristics which all members of a homologous series share.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Give the name of the third member of this series.

name ......................................... [1]

(iii) Deduce the molecular formula of the alcohol whose Mr = 158. Show your working.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Explain why the following two alcohols are isomers.

CH3

CH3 C OH CH3 CH2 CH2 CH2 OH

CH3

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/M/J/15


7

(c) This question is based on typical reactions of butan-1-ol.

(i) When butan-1-ol, CH3–CH2–CH2–CH2–OH, is passed over the catalyst silicon(IV) oxide,
water is lost.

Deduce the name and the structural formula of the organic product in this reaction.

name .........................................

structural formula

[2]

(ii) Suggest the name of the ester formed from butanol and ethanoic acid.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Butan-1-ol is oxidised by acidified potassium manganate(VII).

Deduce the name and the structural formula of the organic product in this reaction.

name .........................................

structural formula

[2]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/M/J/15 [Turn over


8

5 The halogens are a group of non-metals in Group VII of the Periodic Table.

(a) The reactivity of the halogens decreases down the group.

Describe an experiment which shows that chlorine is more reactive than iodine. Include an
equation in your answer.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) The halogens form interhalogen compounds. These are compounds which contain two different
halogens.

Deduce the formula of the compound which has the composition 0.013 moles of iodine atoms
and 0.065 moles of fluorine atoms.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Iodine reacts with chlorine to form a dark brown liquid, iodine monochloride.

chlorine
supplied

crystals
of iodine

I2(s) + Cl 2(g) → 2ICl (l)


dark brown

When more chlorine is added and the tube is sealed, a reversible reaction occurs and the
reaction comes to equilibrium.

ICl (l) + Cl 2(g) ICl 3(s)


dark brown yellow

(i) Give another example of a reversible reaction.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain the term equilibrium.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/M/J/15


9

(d) Chlorine is removed from the tube and a new equilibrium is formed.

Explain why there is less of the yellow solid and more dark brown liquid in the new equilibrium
mixture.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(e) A sealed tube containing the equilibrium mixture is placed in ice-cold water. There is an increase
in the amount of yellow solid in the equilibrium mixture.

What can you deduce about the forward reaction in this equilibrium?

ICl (l) + Cl 2(g) ICl 3(s)

Explain your deduction.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/M/J/15 [Turn over


10

6 Acid-base reactions are examples of proton transfer.

(a) Ethylamine is a weak base and sodium hydroxide is a strong base.

(i) In terms of proton transfer, explain what is meant by the term weak base.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Given aqueous solutions of both bases, describe how you could show that sodium
hydroxide is the stronger base. How could you ensure a ‘fair’ comparison between the two
solutions?

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) Ethylamine reacts with acids to form salts.

CH3CH2NH2 + HCl → CH3CH2NH3Cl


ethylammonium chloride

(i) Complete the equation for the reaction between sulfuric acid and ethylamine. Name the
salt formed.

......CH3CH2NH2 + ............ → .........................

name of salt ............................................................................................. [3]

(ii) Amines and their salts have similar chemical properties to ammonia and ammonium salts.

Suggest a reagent that could be used to displace the weak base, ethylamine, from its salt
ethylammonium chloride.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/M/J/15


11

(c) Gases diffuse, which means that they move to occupy the total available volume.

(i) Explain, using kinetic particle theory, why gases diffuse.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) When the colourless gases hydrogen bromide and ethylamine come into contact, a white
solid is formed.

CH3CH2NH2(g) + HBr(g) → CH3CH2NH3Br(s)


white solid

The following apparatus can be used to compare the rates of diffusion of the two gases
ethylamine and hydrogen bromide.

gives off gives off


CH3CH2NH2(g) HBr(g)

A B C

cotton wool soaked in cotton wool soaked in


ethylamine(aq) conc. hydrobromic acid

Predict at which position, A, B or C, the white solid will form. Explain your choice.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/M/J/15 [Turn over


© UCLES 2015
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements

the live examination series.


Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/31/M/J/15
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*9449031324*

CHEMISTRY 0620/32
Paper 3 (Extended) May/June 2015
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
MODIFIED LANGUAGE

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB15 06_0620_32/FP
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
2

1 Complete the following table which gives the number of protons, electrons and neutrons in each
of the five particles.

number of number of number of


particle
protons electrons neutrons

19 19 20
..............
56
26 Fe
.............. .............. ..............

3 2 4
..............
70 3+
31 Ga
.............. .............. ..............

34 36 45
..............
[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/M/J/15


3

2 The table shows the melting points, boiling points and electrical properties of five substances,
A to E.

electrical electrical
melting point boiling point
substance conductivity conductivity
/ °C / °C
of solid of liquid

A –7 59 poor poor
B 1083 2567 good good
C 755 1387 poor good
D 43 181 poor poor
E 1607 2227 poor poor

Choose a substance from the table above to match each of the following descriptions. A
substance may be used once, more than once or not at all. Justify each choice with evidence
from the table.

One has been completed as an example.

D
This substance is covalent and is a solid at room temperature (25 °C). ..................
Its melting point is above room temperature. It has a low melting point and it does
evidence ....................................................................................................................................
not conduct as a liquid, so it is covalent.
....................................................................................................................................................

(a) This substance has a giant covalent structure. ..................

evidence ....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) This substance is a metal. ..................

evidence ....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) This substance is a liquid at room temperature (25 °C). ..................

evidence ....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(d) This substance is an ionic solid. ..................

evidence ....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/M/J/15 [Turn over


4

3 Calcium reacts with nitrogen to form the ionic compound calcium nitride, Ca3N2.

(a) Draw a diagram, based on the correct formula, which shows the charges on the ions and the
arrangement of the electrons around the negative ion.

Use o to represent an electron from a calcium atom.


Use x to represent an electron from a nitrogen atom.

[3]

(b) In the lattice of calcium nitride, the ratio of calcium ions to nitride ions is 3 : 2.

(i) What is meant by the term lattice?

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) In terms of ionic charges, explain why the ratio of ions is 3 : 2.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) The reaction between calcium and nitrogen to form calcium nitride is a redox reaction.

In terms of electron transfer, explain why calcium is the reducing agent.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/M/J/15


5

4 Ammonia is made by the Haber process.

N2(g) + 3H2(g) 2NH3(g)

The forward reaction is exothermic.

Typical reaction conditions are:

• finely divided iron catalyst,


• temperature 450 °C,
• pressure 200 atmospheres.

(a) Explain why the catalyst is used as a very fine powder and larger pieces of iron are not used.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Using the above conditions, the equilibrium mixture contains about 15% ammonia.

State two changes to the reaction conditions which would increase the percentage of
ammonia at equilibrium.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Suggest why the changes you have described in (b) are not used in practice.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/M/J/15 [Turn over


6

5 Three common methods of preparing salts are shown below.

method A adding an excess of an insoluble base or carbonate or metal to a dilute acid and
removing excess by filtration

method B using a burette and indicator

method C mixing two solutions to obtain the salt by precipitation

For each of the following salt preparations, choose a method, A, B or C. Name any additional
reagent which is needed and complete the equation.

(a) the soluble salt, nickel chloride, from the insoluble compound nickel carbonate

method .......................................................................................................................................

reagent ......................................................................................................................................

word equation ............................................................................................................................


[3]

(b) the insoluble salt, lead(II) bromide, from aqueous lead(II) nitrate

method .......................................................................................................................................

reagent ......................................................................................................................................

ionic equation ........ + ........ → PbBr2


[3]

(c) the soluble salt, lithium sulfate, from the soluble base lithium hydroxide

method .......................................................................................................................................

reagent ......................................................................................................................................

equation .....................................................................................................................................
[4]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/M/J/15


7

6 The Atacama desert in Chile has deposits of the salt sodium nitrate. Very large amounts of this
salt were exported to Europe for use as a fertiliser. After the introduction of the Haber process in
1913, this trade rapidly diminished.

(a) (i) Explain why the introduction of the Haber process reduced the demand for
sodium nitrate.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Suggest why surface deposits of sodium nitrate only occur in areas with very low rainfall
such as desert areas.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) The desert has smaller surface deposits of potassium nitrate.

Suggest why potassium nitrate is a better fertiliser than the sodium salt.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) All nitrates decompose when heated. The extent to which a nitrate decomposes is
determined by the metal in the salt.

(i) Sodium nitrate decomposes to form sodium nitrite, NaNO2.

Write the equation for decomposition of sodium nitrate.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Sodium nitrite is a reducing agent.

What would be observed if an excess of sodium nitrite solution was added to a solution
of acidified potassium manganate(VII)?

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) Copper(II) nitrate decomposes to form copper(II) oxide, nitrogen dioxide and oxygen.

What is the relationship between the extent of decomposition and the reactivity of the
metal in the nitrate?

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/M/J/15 [Turn over


8

(c) The equation for the decomposition of copper(II) nitrate is given below.

2Cu(NO3)2 → 2CuO + 4NO2 + O2

(i) Predict what you would observe when copper(II) nitrate is heated.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Copper(II) nitrate forms a series of hydrates with the formula Cu(NO3)2.xH2O.
All these hydrates decompose to form copper(II) oxide.
1 mole of Cu(NO3)2.xH2O forms 1 mole of CuO.

What is meant by 1 mole of a substance?

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) 7.26 g of a hydrate, Cu(NO3)2.xH2O, formed 2.4 g copper(II) oxide.

number of moles of CuO formed = ......................

number of moles of Cu(NO3)2.xH2O in 7.26 g = ......................

mass of 1 mole of Cu(NO3)2.xH2O = ...................... g

mass of 1 mole of Cu(NO3)2 is 188 g

the value of x in this hydrate = ......................


[4]

[Total: 18]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/M/J/15


9

7 Alcohols can be made by fermentation or from petroleum.

(a) Ethanol can be made by the fermentation of glucose.

yeast
C6H12O6(aq) 2C2H5OH(aq) + 2CO2(g) exothermic reaction

Yeast are living single-cell fungi which ferment glucose by anaerobic respiration. This
reaction is catalysed by enzymes from the yeast.

(i) What is meant by the term respiration?

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Anaerobic means in the absence of oxygen.

Name the products formed from respiration in the presence of oxygen.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) What are enzymes?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) Suggest a method of measuring the rate of this reaction.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) The following observations were noted.

• When a small amount of yeast was added to the aqueous glucose the reaction started
and the solution went slightly cloudy.
• The reaction rate increased and the solution became cloudier and warmer.
• After a while, the reaction rate decreased and eventually stopped, leaving a 14%
solution of ethanol in water.

(i) Why did the reaction rate increase?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Suggest an explanation for the increase in cloudiness of the solution.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Give two reasons why the fermentation stopped.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/M/J/15 [Turn over


10

(c) One use of ethanol is in alcoholic drinks.

Give two other uses of ethanol.

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(d) Alcohols can be made from petroleum by the following sequence of reactions.

alkanes from petroleum → alkene → alcohol

Describe the manufacture of ethanol from hexane, C6H14. Include in your description an
equation and type of reaction for each step.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 17]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/M/J/15


11

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/M/J/15


© UCLES 2015
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements

the live examination series.


Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/32/M/J/15
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227

Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
w
w
w
.X
t
re
m
eP
ap
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education

s.
co
m
*5805031630*

CHEMISTRY 0620/31
Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


For Examiner’s Use
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
1
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 2

Total

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB10 11_0620_31/3RP
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
2
For
1 The table gives the composition of three particles. Examiner’s
Use

number of number of number of


particle
protons electrons neutrons

A 15 15 16
B 15 18 16
C 15 15 17

(a) What is the evidence in the table for each of the following?

(i) Particle A is an atom.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) They are all particles of the same element.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Particle B is a negative ion.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iv) Particles A and C are isotopes.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) (i) What is the electronic structure of particle A?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) What is the valency of the element?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Is the element a metal or a non-metal? Give a reason for your choice.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2010 0620/31/O/N/10


3
For
2 About 4000 years ago the Bronze Age started in Britain. Bronze is an alloy of copper and Examiner’s
tin. Use

(a) (i) Suggest a reason why a bronze axe was better than a copper axe.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Brass is another copper alloy. Name the other metal in brass.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) The diagram below shows the arrangement of particles in a pure metal.

(i) What is the name given to a regular arrangement of particles in a crystalline solid?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Draw a diagram which shows the arrangement of particles in an alloy.

[2]

(iii) Explain the term malleable.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) Why are metals malleable?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2010 0620/31/O/N/10 [Turn over


4
For
(c) The common ore of tin is tin(IV) oxide and an ore of copper is malachite, Examiner’s
CuCO3.Cu(OH)2. Use

(i) Write a word equation for the reduction of tin(IV) oxide by carbon.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Malachite is heated to form copper oxide and two other chemicals.
Name these chemicals.

................................................... and ................................................................. [2]

(iii) Copper oxide is reduced to copper which is then refined by electrolysis.


Label the diagram of the apparatus which could be used to refine copper.

power
supply
– +

[3]

(iv) Give one use of copper, other than making alloys.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2010 0620/31/O/N/10


5
For
3 The diagram shows a cell. This is a device which produces electrical energy. The reaction in Examiner’s
a cell is a redox reaction and involves electron transfer. Use

V
+ –
inert electrode inert electrode

solution of solution of iron(II) salt


bromine Fe2+(aq)
Br2(aq)

filter paper soaked in


sodium chloride solution
to complete the circuit

(i) Complete the sentence.

A cell will change ................................................ energy into electrical energy. [1]

(ii) Draw an arrow on the diagram to show the direction of the electron flow. [1]

(iii) In the left hand beaker, the colour changes from brown to colourless.
Complete the equation for the reaction.

Br2 + ............... → ...............


[2]

(iv) Is the change in (iii) oxidation or reduction? Give a reason for your choice.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(v) Complete the following description of the reaction in the right hand beaker.

Fe2+ changes into ......................... . [1]

(vi) When a solution of bromine is replaced by a solution of chlorine, the voltage


increases. When a solution of bromine is replaced by a solution of iodine, the voltage
decreases.
Suggest an explanation for this difference.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2010 0620/31/O/N/10 [Turn over


6
For
4 Ammonia is an important industrial chemical. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Give the electron structure of an atom of nitrogen.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Use this electronic structure, rather than the valency of nitrogen, to explain why the
formula of ammonia is NH3 not NH4.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Ammonia is made by the Haber Process.

N2(g) + 3H2(g) 2NH3(g) forward reaction is exothermic

The percentage of ammonia in the equilibrium mixture varies with conditions.

pressure / atmospheres 100 200 300 400


% ammonia at 300 °C 45 65 72 78
% ammonia at 500 °C 9 18 25 31

The conditions actually used are 200 atmospheres, 450 °C and an iron catalyst.

(i) The original catalyst was platinum. Suggest a reason why it was changed to iron.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Explain why the highest pressure gives the highest percentage of ammonia in the
equilibrium mixture.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) What happens to the unreacted nitrogen and hydrogen?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2010 0620/31/O/N/10


7
For
(iv) State one advantage and one disadvantage of using a lower temperature. Examiner’s
Use
advantage .................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

disadvantage ............................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2010 0620/31/O/N/10 [Turn over


8
For
5 Monomers polymerise to form polymers or macromolecules. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Explain the term polymerise.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) There are two types of polymerisation - addition and condensation. What is the
difference between them?

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) An important monomer is chloroethene which has the structural formula shown below.

H H

C C

H Cl

It is made by the following method.

C2H4 + Cl 2 → C2H4 Cl 2 dichloroethane

This is heated to make chloroethene.

C2H4Cl 2 → C2H3Cl + HCl

(i) Ethene is made by cracking alkanes. Complete the equation for cracking
dodecane.

C12H26 → .................... + 2C2H4


[1]

Another method of making dichloroethane is from ethane.

C2H6 + 2Cl 2 → C2H4Cl 2 + 2HCl

(ii) Suggest a reason why the method using ethene is preferred.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Describe an industrial method of making chlorine.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2010 0620/31/O/N/10


9
For
(iv) Draw the structural formula of poly(chloroethene). Examiner’s
Use
Include three monomer units.

[2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2010 0620/31/O/N/10 [Turn over


10
For
6 The table below shows the elements in the second period of the Periodic Table and some of Examiner’s
their oxidation states in their most common compounds. Use

element Li Be B C N O F Ne
number of outer electrons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
oxidation state +1 +2 +3 +4 –3 –2 –1 0

(a) (i) What does it mean when the only oxidation state of an element is zero?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Explain why some elements have positive oxidation states but others have negative
ones.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Select two elements in the table which exist as diatomic molecules of the type X2.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Beryllium hydroxide, a white solid, is an amphoteric hydroxide.

(i) Name another metal which has an amphoteric hydroxide.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Suggest what you would observe when an excess of aqueous sodium hydroxide is
added gradually to aqueous beryllium sulfate.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) (i) Give the formulae of lithium fluoride and nitrogen fluoride.

lithium fluoride ..........................................................................................................

nitrogen fluoride .................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2010 0620/31/O/N/10


11
For
(ii) Predict two differences in their properties. Examiner’s
Use
....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Explain why these two fluorides have different properties.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2010 0620/31/O/N/10 [Turn over


12
For
7 The diagram shows part of the carbon cycle. This includes some of the processes which Examiner’s
determine the percentage of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere. Use

carbon dioxide
in the atmosphere

combustion respiration

photosynthesis

(i) Carbon dioxide is one greenhouse gas. Name another one.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Explain the term respiration and how this process increases the percentage of
carbon dioxide in the atmosphere.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(iii) Explain why the combustion of waste crop material should not alter the percentage
of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iv) In 1960 the percentage of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere was 0.032% and in
2008 it was 0.038%. Suggest an explanation for this increase.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2010 0620/31/O/N/10


13
For
8 Soluble salts can be made using a base and an acid. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Complete this method of preparing dry crystals of the soluble salt
cobalt(II) chloride-6-water from the insoluble base cobalt(II) carbonate.

Step 1
Add an excess of cobalt(II) carbonate to hot dilute hydrochloric acid.

Step 2

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

Step 3

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

Step 4

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

© UCLES 2010 0620/31/O/N/10 [Turn over


14
For
(b) 6.0 g of cobalt(II) carbonate was added to 40 cm3 of hydrochloric acid, concentration Examiner’s
2.0 mol / dm3. Calculate the maximum yield of cobalt(II) chloride-6-water and show that Use
the cobalt(II) carbonate was in excess.

CoCO3 + 2HCl → CoCl 2 + CO2 + H2O

CoCl 2 + 6H2O → CoCl 2.6H2O

Maximum yield

Number of moles of HCl used = .........................

Number of moles of CoCl 2 formed = .........................

Number of moles of CoCl 2.6H2O formed = .........................

Mass of one mole of CoCl 2.6H2O = 238 g

Maximum yield of CoCl 2.6H2O = ......................... g [4]

To show that cobalt(II) carbonate is in excess

Number of moles of HCl used = ......................... (use value from above)

Mass of one mole of CoCO3 = 119 g

Number of moles of CoCO3 in 6.0 g of cobalt(II) carbonate = ......................... [1]

Explain why cobalt(II) carbonate is in excess .................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2010 0620/31/O/N/10


15

BLANK PAGE

0620/31/O/N/10
© UCLES 2010
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/31/O/N/10
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209

Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
w
w
w
.X
t
re
m
eP
ap
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education

s.
co
m
*7061419556*

CHEMISTRY 0620/32
Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. For Examiner’s Use
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 1

Total

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

IB10 11_0620_32/2RP
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
2
For
1 The following table gives information about six substances. Examiner’s
Use

melting point boiling point electrical conductivity electrical conductivity


substance
/ °C / °C as a solid as a liquid

A 839 1484 good good


B –210 –196 poor poor
C 776 1497 poor good
D –117 78 poor poor
E 1607 2227 poor poor
F –5 102 poor good

(a) Which substance could have a macromolecular structure, similar to that of silicon(IV)
oxide?

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Which substances are solids at room temperature?

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Which substance could be a metal?

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) Which substance could be aqueous sodium chloride?

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(e) Which substance is an ionic compound?

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(f) Which substances are liquids at room temperature?

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/O/N/10


3
For
2 An ore of the important metal zinc is zinc blende, ZnS. This is changed into zinc oxide which Examiner’s
is reduced to the impure metal by carbon reduction. Use

(a) (i) How is zinc oxide obtained from zinc sulfide?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Write a balanced equation for the reduction of zinc oxide by carbon.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) The major impurity in the zinc is cadmium. The boiling point of zinc is 907 °C and that
of cadmium is 767 °C.
Name a technique which could be used to separate these two metals.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) In common with most metals, zinc is a good conductor of electricity. It is used as an
electrode in cells.

(i) Give two other uses of zinc.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Describe the metallic bonding in zinc and then explain why it is a good conductor of
electricity.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [4]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/O/N/10 [Turn over


4
For
3 The decomposition of hydrogen peroxide is catalysed by manganese(IV) oxide. Examiner’s
Use
2H2O2(aq) → 2H2O(l) + O2(g)

To 50 cm3 of aqueous hydrogen peroxide, 0.50 g of manganese(IV) oxide was added. The
volume of oxygen formed was measured every 20 seconds. The average reaction rate was
calculated for each 20 second interval.

time / s 0 20 40 60 80 100
volume of oxygen / cm3 0 48 70 82 88 88
average reaction rate in cm3 / s 2.4 1.1 ............. 0.3 0.0 0.0

(a) Explain how the average reaction rate, 2.4 cm3 / s, was calculated for the first 20
seconds.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Complete the table. [1]

(c) Explain why the average reaction rate decreases with time.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) The experiment was repeated but 1.0 g of manganese(IV) oxide was added.
What effect, if any, would this have on the reaction rate and on the final volume of oxygen?
Give a reason for each answer.

effect on rate ............................................................................................................... [1]

reason ...............................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

effect on final volume of oxygen ................................................................................. [1]

reason ...............................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/O/N/10


5
For
4 Chromium is a transition element. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Predict two differences in the physical properties of chromium and sodium.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Predict two differences in the chemical properties of chromium and sodium.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Chromium is used to electroplate steel objects. The diagram shows how this could be
done.
add more
chromium(III)
+ sulfate(aq) –

lead anode object to


be plated
chromium(III)
sulfate(aq)

(i) Give two reasons why steel objects are plated with chromium.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) The formula of the chromium(III) ion is Cr3+ and of the sulfate ion is SO42–. Give the
formula of chromium(III) sulfate.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Write the equation for the reaction at the negative electrode (cathode).

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iv) A colourless gas, which relights a glowing splint, is formed at the positive electrode
(anode). Name this gas.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/O/N/10 [Turn over


6
For
(v) During electrolysis, it is necessary to add more chromium(III) sulfate but during Examiner’s
copper-plating using a copper anode, it is not necessary to add more copper(II) Use
sulfate. Explain.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/O/N/10


7
For
5 In the absence of oxygen, certain bacteria decompose carbohydrates to biogas. This is a Examiner’s
mixture of gases mainly methane and carbon dioxide. Use
Biogas is becoming an increasingly important fuel around the world.

A diagram of a simple biogas generator is given below. Typically, it contains biomass - animal
manure, plant material etc.

biogas
biomass
added

waste material
removed

(a) (i) What is meant by the term carbohydrate?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) The reaction in the generator is an example of anaerobic respiration.


Anaerobic means in the absence of oxygen. What does respiration mean?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) The generator must produce some carbon dioxide.


Why is it impossible for it to produce only a hydrocarbon such as methane?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) Suggest a use for the nitrogen-rich solid removed from the generator.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/O/N/10 [Turn over


8
For
(b) (i) In an experiment, a 60 cm3 sample of biogas required 80 cm3 of oxygen for the Examiner’s
complete combustion of the methane in the sample. Use
Calculate the percentage of methane in the sample of biogas. Assume that biogas
contains only methane and carbon dioxide.

CH4 + 2O2 → CO2 + 2H2O

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Carbon dioxide is acidic and methane is neutral.


Suggest another way of measuring the volume of methane in the sample.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/O/N/10


9
For
6 The alcohols form an homologous series. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Give three characteristics of an homologous series.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) The following two alcohols are members of the series and they are isomers.

CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CH2 — OH and (CH3)2CH — CH2OH

(i) Explain why they are isomers.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Give the structural formula of another alcohol which is also an isomer of these
alcohols.

[1]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/O/N/10 [Turn over


10
For
(c) Copper(II) oxide can oxidise butan-1-ol to liquid X whose pH is 4. Examiner’s
Use
mineral wool
soaked in butan-1-ol copper(II) oxide

heat

liquid X
formed by
oxidation of
butan-1-ol.

(i) Name another reagent which can oxidise butan-1-ol.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) What type of compound is liquid X and what is its formula?

type of compound ............................................................................................... [1]

formula of liquid X

[1]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/O/N/10


11
For
(d) The alcohol ethanol can be made by fermentation. Yeast is added to aqueous glucose. Examiner’s
Use
C6H12O6(aq) → 2C2H5OH(aq) + 2CO2(g)

Carbon dioxide is given off and the mixture becomes warm as the reaction is exothermic.
The graph shows how the rate of reaction varies over several days.

rate of
reaction

time

(i) Suggest a method of measuring the rate of this reaction.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Why does the rate increase initially?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Suggest two reasons why the rate eventually decreases.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iv) Why is fermentation carried out in the absence of air?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/O/N/10 [Turn over


12
For
7 The major use of sulfur dioxide is to manufacture sulfuric acid. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Another use of sulfur dioxide is as the food additive E220.
How does it preserve food?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Why is sulfur dioxide used in the manufacture of wood pulp?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) How is sulfur dioxide manufactured?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Complete the following description of the manufacture of sulfuric acid.

Sulfur dioxide reacts with .............................. to form sulfur trioxide.

The above reaction is catalysed by ................................................. .

The optimum temperature for this reaction is .............................. °C.

Sulfur trioxide needs to react with .............................. to form sulfuric acid. [4]

(c) (i) Define the term acid.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Sulfuric acid is a strong acid. Ethanedioic acid is a weak acid.


Given solutions of both acids, how could you show that sulfuric acid is a strong acid
and ethanedioic acid is a weak acid?

method ......................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

result for each acid ...................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/O/N/10


13
For
(d) 20.0 cm3 of sulfuric acid, concentration 0.30 mol / dm3, was added to 40 cm3 of sodium Examiner’s
hydroxide, concentration 0.20 mol / dm3. Use

2NaOH + H2SO4 → Na2SO4 + 2H2O

(i) How many moles of H2SO4 were added? .............................. [1]

(ii) How many moles of NaOH were used? .............................. [1]

(iii) Which reagent is in excess? Give a reason for your choice.

reagent in excess ............................................................................................... [1]

reason .......................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) Is the pH of the final mixture less than 7, equal to 7 or more than 7?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/O/N/10


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/O/N/10


15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2010 0620/32/O/N/10


© UCLES 2010
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/32/O/N/10
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209

Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
w
w
w
.X
t
re
m
eP
ap
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education

s.
co
m
*2824794606*

CHEMISTRY 0620/33
Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. For Examiner’s Use
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 1

Total

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

IB10 11_0620_33/3RP
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
2
For
1 The diagrams below show the electron arrangement in two compounds. Examiner’s
Use

+ –
K Cl H O H

(a) In a water molecule, each hydrogen atom is bonded to the oxygen atom by sharing a pair
of electrons.
Why does an oxygen atom share two pairs of electrons rather than just one pair?

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Describe how a potassium atom becomes a potassium ion.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Why is there a bond between the ions in potassium chloride?

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) Solid potassium chloride is a poor conductor of electricity. When dissolved in water it is
a good conductor. Explain.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 5]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/O/N/10


3
For
2 Vanadium is a transition element. Examiner’s
Use
51
(a) An atom of the most common isotope of vanadium can be represented as 23 V .

Complete the following table to show the number of protons, electrons and neutrons in
each particle.

number of number of number of


particle
protons electrons neutrons
51
23 V

51 3+
23 V

50
23 V

[3]

(b) The major use of vanadium is to make vanadium steel alloys.

(i) Explain the phrase steel alloys.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) State the name and use of another steel alloy.

name ..........................................................................................................................

use ....................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Two of the oxidation states of vanadium are +3 and +4.

(i) Write the formula of vanadium(III) oxide and of vanadium(IV) oxide.

vanadium(III) oxide ...................................................................................................

vanadium(IV) oxide ............................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Vanadium(III) oxide is basic and vandium(IV) oxide is amphoteric.


Describe how you would obtain a sample of vanadium(III) oxide from a mixture of
these two oxides.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/O/N/10 [Turn over


4
For
3 The reactions of a metal and the thermal stability of some of its compounds are determined Examiner’s
by the position of the metal in the reactivity series. Use

(a) To find the order of reactivity of the metals, cobalt, magnesium, silver and tin, the following
experiments were carried out.

experiment result

tin plus silver(I) nitrate solution silvery layer on tin


magnesium plus tin(II) nitrate solution grey deposit on magnesium
tin plus cobalt nitrate solution no reaction

(i) Give as far as possible the order of reactivity of these metals.


Write the least reactive first.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) What additional experiment needs to be done to put all four metals in order of
reactivity?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Write an ionic equation for the reaction between tin atoms and silver(I) ions. Indicate
on the equation the change which is oxidation.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) Sodium is a more reactive metal than magnesium. Sodium compounds are more stable
than magnesium compounds.

In an experiment, their hydroxides were heated. If the hydroxide did not decompose write
‘no reaction’ otherwise complete the equation.

NaOH → .................................................

Mg(OH)2 → ................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/O/N/10


5
For
(c) A cell consists of two different metal electrodes in an electrolyte. Examiner’s
Three possible cells are shown below. Use

1.1 V 0.5 V ............... V


V V V

– + + –

zinc copper tin zinc tin

dilute acid dilute acid dilute acid

(i) Why is the more reactive metal the negative electrode?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) How can you deduce that zinc is more reactive than tin?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) How could you change the zinc/copper cell to have a voltage greater than 1.1 V?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) Complete the labelling of the zinc/tin cell. [2]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/O/N/10 [Turn over


6
For
4 The electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium chloride, between inert electrodes, is used Examiner’s
to make four important chemicals. Use

hydrogen
chlorine
sodium hydroxide
sodium chlorate(I)

(a) The ions present in the electrolyte are Na+, H+, Cl – and OH –.

(i) Hydrogen ions are discharged at the negative electrode (cathode).


Write an equation for this reaction.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) The hydrogen ions are from the water.

H2O H+ + OH –

Suggest an explanation why the concentration of hydroxide ions increases.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) When a dilute solution of sodium chloride is used, chlorine is not formed at the
positive electrode (anode), a different gas is produced. Name this gas.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) State an example of an inert electrode.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) (i) State a use of hydrogen.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Why is chlorine used to treat the water supply?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/O/N/10


7
For
(c) Sodium chlorate(I) is made by the reaction between chlorine and sodium hydroxide. It is Examiner’s
used as bleach but over time it decomposes. Use

2NaCl O(aq) → 2NaCl (aq) + O2(g)

The rate of decomposition can be studied using the apparatus shown below.

sodium chlorate(I) solution

(i) How could you measure the rate of decomposition of sodium chlorate(I)?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Describe how you could show that the rate of decomposition of sodium chlorate(I) is
a photochemical reaction.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/O/N/10 [Turn over


8
For
5 Carboxylic acids contain the group Examiner’s
Use
O

C or COOH.

O H

(a) Ethanoic acid is a typical carboxylic acid. It forms ethanoates.

(i) Complete the following equations.

Mg + ...............CH3COOH → .................................... + ....................................


[2]

sodium + ethanoic → .................................... + ....................................


hydroxide acid
....................................
[1]

(ii) Ethanoic acid reacts with ethanol to form an ester. Give the name of the ester and
draw its structural formula. Show all of the bonds.

name ..........................................................................................................................

structural formula

[2]

(b) Maleic acid is an unsaturated acid. 5.8 g of this acid contained 2.4 g of carbon, 0.2 g of
hydrogen and 3.2 g of oxygen.

(i) How do you know that the acid contained only carbon, hydrogen and oxygen?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Calculate the empirical formula of maleic acid.

Number of moles of carbon atoms = ................................


Number of moles of hydrogen atoms = ................................
Number of moles of oxygen atoms = ................................

The empirical formula is ...................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/O/N/10


9
For
(iii) The mass of one mole of maleic acid is 116 g. What is its molecular formula? Examiner’s
Use
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iv) Maleic acid is dibasic. One mole of acid produces two moles of H+. Deduce its
structural formula.

[2]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/O/N/10 [Turn over


10
For
6 The Kinetic Theory explains the properties of matter in terms of the arrangement and Examiner’s
movement of particles. Use

(a) Nitrogen is a gas at room temperature. Nitrogen molecules, N2, which are spread far
apart move in a random manner at high speed.

(i) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in a nitrogen
molecule.
Use × to represent an electron from a nitrogen atom.

[2]

(ii) How does the movement and arrangement of the molecules in a crystal of nitrogen
differ from those in gaseous nitrogen?

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) Use the ideas of the Kinetic Theory to explain the following.

(i) A sealed container contains nitrogen gas. The pressure of a gas is due to the
molecules of the gas hitting the walls of the container.
Explain why the pressure inside the container increases when the temperature is
increased.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/O/N/10


11
For
(ii) The following apparatus can be used to measure the rate of diffusion of a gas. Examiner’s
Use
constant
pressure
applied metal foil
gas escapes
gas syringe gas through small
hole in foil

The following results were obtained.

temperature rate of diffusion


gas
/ °C in cm3 / min

nitrogen 25 1.00
chlorine 25 0.63
nitrogen 50 1.05

Explain why nitrogen diffuses faster than chlorine.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

Explain why the nitrogen diffuses faster at the higher temperature.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/O/N/10 [Turn over


12
For
7 Synthetic polymers are widely used in the modern world. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Their use has brought considerable advantages to modern life as well as some
disadvantages.

(i) Suggest two advantages of a plastic bucket compared to a steel bucket.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Name two uses of man-made fibres, such as nylon and Terylene.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Describe the pollution caused by synthetic polymers.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) One type of polymer is formed by addition polymerisation.

(i) The structural formula of an addition polymer is given below.

CH CH2

CH3 n

Give the name and structural formula of the monomer.

name of monomer ............................................................................................... [1]

structural formula of monomer

[1]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/O/N/10


13
For
(ii) Draw the structural formula of the addition polymer formed by the polymerisation of Examiner’s
phenylethene. The structural formula of phenylethene is given below. Use

C 6 H5 H

C C

H H

[2]

(c) Nylon is made by condensation polymerisation. It has the structural formula shown
below.

C (CH2)8 C N (CH2)6 N

O O H H

(i) Name the linkage in this polymer.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Name the natural macromolecules which have the same linkage.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Deduce the formulae of the two monomers which reacted to form the nylon and
water.

monomer ...................................................................................................................

monomer ...................................................................................................................

[2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/O/N/10


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/O/N/10


15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2010 0620/33/O/N/10


© UCLES 2010
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/33/O/N/10
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209

Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
w
w
w
.X
t
re
m
eP
ap
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education

s.
co
m
*0279941738*

CHEMISTRY 0620/31
Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. For Examiner’s Use
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 1

Total

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB11 11_0620_31/2RP
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/O/N/11


3
For
1 This question is concerned with the following oxides. Examiner’s
Use
sulfur dioxide
carbon monoxide
lithium oxide
aluminium oxide
nitrogen dioxide
strontium oxide

(a) (i) Which of the above oxides will react with hydrochloric acid but not with aqueous
sodium hydroxide?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Which of the above oxides will react with aqueous sodium hydroxide but not with
hydrochloric acid?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Which of the above oxides will react with both hydrochloric acid and aqueous sodium
hydroxide?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) Which of the above oxides will not react with hydrochloric acid or with aqueous
sodium hydroxide?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Two of the oxides are responsible for acid rain.


Identify the two oxides and explain their presence in the atmosphere.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [5]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/O/N/11 [Turn over


4
For
(c) Lithium oxide is an ionic compound. Examiner’s
Use
(i) Identify another ionic oxide in the list on page 3.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Draw a diagram which shows the formula of lithium oxide, the charges on the ions
and the arrangement of the valency electrons around the negative ion.
Use x to represent an electron from an atom of oxygen.
Use o to represent an electron from an atom of lithium.

[2]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/O/N/11


5
For
2 Two important greenhouse gases are methane and carbon dioxide. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Methane is twenty times more effective as a greenhouse gas than carbon dioxide. The
methane in the atmosphere comes from both natural and industrial sources.

(i) Describe two natural sources of methane.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Although methane can persist in the atmosphere for up to 15 years, it is eventually
removed by oxidation.
What are the products of this oxidation?

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) How do the processes of respiration, combustion and photosynthesis determine the
percentage of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere?

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/O/N/11 [Turn over


6
For
3 Aluminium is extracted by the electrolysis of a molten mixture of alumina, which is aluminium Examiner’s
oxide, and cryolite. Use

waste gases,
oxygen and carbon dioxide,
from anode

carbon anode (+)

mixture of aluminium
carbon cathode (–) 900 °C oxide and cryolite

aluminium at cathode

(a) (i) Alumina is obtained from the main ore of aluminium.


Name this ore.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Explain why it is necessary to use a mixture, alumina and cryolite, rather than just
alumina.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Copper can be extracted by the electrolysis of an aqueous solution.


Suggest why the electrolysis of an aqueous solution cannot be used to extract
aluminium.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) The ions which are involved in the electrolysis are Al 3+ and O2–. The products of this
electrolysis are given on the diagram.
Explain how they are formed. Use equations where appropriate.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/O/N/11


7
For
(c) The uses of a metal are determined by its properties. Examiner’s
Use
(i) Foods which are acidic can be supplied in aluminium containers.

food that is acidic


CH
LEM IC
ON IN KEN
SA
UC
E
aluminium container

Explain why the acid in the food does not react with the aluminium.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Explain why overhead electrical power cables are made from aluminium with a steel
core.

aluminium

steel core

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/O/N/11 [Turn over


8
For
4 Reversible reactions can come to equilibrium. The following are three examples of types of Examiner’s
gaseous equilibria. Use

A2(g) + B2(g) 2AB(g) reaction 1


A2(g) + 3B2(g) 2AB3(g) reaction 2
2AB2(g) 2AB(g) + B2(g) reaction 3

(a) Explain the term equilibrium.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) The following graphs show how the percentage of products of a reversible reaction at
equilibrium could vary with pressure.
For each graph, decide whether the percentage of products decreases, increases or
stays the same when the pressure is increased, then match each graph to one of the
above reactions and give a reason for your choice.

(i)

% product at
equilibrium

0
0 pressure

effect on percentage of products ...............................................................................

reaction ......................................................................................................................

reason ........................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(ii)

% product at
equilibrium

0
0 pressure

effect on percentage of products ...............................................................................

reaction ......................................................................................................................

reason ........................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/O/N/11


9
For
(iii) Examiner’s
Use

% product at
equilibrium

0
0 pressure

effect on percentage of products ...............................................................................

reaction ......................................................................................................................

reason ........................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/O/N/11 [Turn over


10
For
5 The rate of the reaction between iron and aqueous bromine can be investigated using the Examiner’s
apparatus shown below. Use

attached to stirrer

piece of metal rotates

piece of metal (iron)

solution of bromine

(a) A piece of iron was weighed and placed in the apparatus. It was removed at regular
intervals and the clock was paused. The piece of iron was washed, dried, weighed and
replaced. The clock was restarted.
This was continued until the solution was colourless.
The mass of iron was plotted against time. The graph shows the results obtained.

mass of
iron

0
0 time (iron was in
solution of bromine)

(i) Suggest an explanation for the shape of the graph.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(ii) Predict the shape of the graph if a similar piece of iron with a much rougher surface
had been used.
Explain your answer.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/O/N/11


11
For
(iii) Describe how you could find out if the rate of this reaction depended on the speed Examiner’s
of stirring. Use

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Iron has two oxidation states +2 and +3. There are two possible equations for the redox
reaction between iron and bromine.

Fe + Br2 → Fe2+ + 2Br –

2Fe + 3Br2 → 2Fe3+ + 6Br –

(i) Indicate, on the first equation, the change which is oxidation. Give a reason for your
choice.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Which substance in the first equation is the reductant (reducing agent)?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Describe how you could test the solution to find out which ion, Fe2+ or Fe3+, is present.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/O/N/11 [Turn over


12
For
6 Structural formulae are an essential part of Organic Chemistry. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Draw the structural formula of each of the following. Show all the bonds in the structure.

(i) ethanoic acid

[1]

(ii) ethanol

[1]

(b) (i) Ethanoic acid and ethanol react to form an ester.


What is the name of this ester?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) The same linkage is found in polyesters. Draw the structure of the polyester which
can be formed from the monomers shown below.

HOOC — C6H4 — COOH and HO — CH2 — CH2 — OH

[3]

(iii) Describe the pollution problems caused by non-biodegradable polymers.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/O/N/11


13
For
(c) Two macromolecules have the same amide linkage. Examiner’s
Nylon, a synthetic polymer, has the following structure. Use

O O O O O

C C N N C C N N C

H H H H

Protein, a natural macromolecule, has the following structure.

N C N C N C N C

H O H O H O H O

How are they different?

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/O/N/11 [Turn over


14
For
7 Some hydroxides, nitrates and carbonates decompose when heated. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Name a metal hydroxide which does not decompose when heated.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Write the equation for the thermal decomposition of copper(II) hydroxide.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Suggest why these two hydroxides behave differently.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) (i) Metal nitrates, except those of the Group 1 metals, form three products when heated.
Name the products formed when zinc nitrate is heated.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Write the equation for the thermal decomposition of potassium nitrate.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) There are three possible equations for the thermal decomposition of sodium
hydrogencarbonate.

2NaHCO3(s) → Na2O(s) + 2CO2(g) + H2O(g) equation 1


NaHCO3(s) → NaOH(s) + CO2(g) equation 2
2NaHCO3(s) → Na2CO3(s) + CO2(g) + H2O(g) equation 3

The following experiment was carried out to determine which one of the above is the
correct equation.

A known mass of sodium hydrogencarbonate was heated for ten minutes. It was then
allowed to cool and weighed.

Results
Mass of sodium hydrogencarbonate = 3.36 g
Mass of the residue = 2.12 g

Calculation
Mr for NaHCO3 = 84 g; Mr for Na2O = 62 g; Mr for NaOH = 40 g
Mr for Na2CO3 = 106 g

(i) Number of moles of NaHCO3 used = ............... [1]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/O/N/11


15
For
(ii) If residue is Na2O, number of moles of Na2O = ............... Examiner’s
Use
If residue is NaOH, number of moles of NaOH = ...............

If residue is Na2CO3, number of moles of Na2CO3 = ............... [2]

(iii) Use the number of moles calculated in (i) and (ii) to decide which one of the three
equations is correct. Explain your choice.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2011 0620/31/O/N/11


© UCLES 2011
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/31/O/N/11
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209

Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
w
w
w
.X
t
re
m
eP
ap
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education

s.
co
m
*4888728650*

CHEMISTRY 0620/32
Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. For Examiner’s Use
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 1

Total

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

IB11 11_0620_32/2RP
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2
For
1 Cobalt is an element in Period 4 of the Periodic Table. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Use your copy of the Periodic Table to help you complete the table below.

number of number of number of


particle
protons neutrons electrons

Co
Co2+

[2]

60
(b) Co is a cobalt isotope.

(i) Explain the term isotope.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Explain why two isotopes of the same element have identical chemical properties.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) State one industrial use and one medical use of radioactive isotopes.

industrial use ....................................................................................................... [1]

medical use ......................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/O/N/11


3
For
2 Sulfur is needed for the production of sulfuric acid. Two of the major sources of sulfur are Examiner’s
Use
● underground deposits of the element sulfur,
● sulfur compounds from natural gas and petroleum.

(a) Explain why sulfur and its compounds are removed from these fuels before they are
burned.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Sulfur dioxide is made by spraying molten sulfur into air. The sulfur ignites and sulfur
dioxide is formed.

(i) Suggest why molten sulfur is used in the form of a fine spray.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Explain why traces of sulfur dioxide act as a preservative in fruit juices.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) State another use of sulfur dioxide.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Describe how sulfur dioxide is changed into sulfur trioxide. Give the reaction conditions
and an equation.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

(d) Complete the following equations for the formation of sulfuric acid from sulfur trioxide.

SO3 + ............... → H2S2O7

H2S2O7 + ………. → ..........H2SO4 [2]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/O/N/11 [Turn over


4
For
3 Antimony, Sb, is an element in Group V. Examiner’s
Use
(a) The main ore of antimony is its sulfide. The extraction of antimony is similar to that of
zinc.
Describe how each of these changes in the extraction of antimony is carried out.

(i) antimony sulfide to antimony oxide

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) antimony oxide to antimony

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Antimony oxide is a white powder which is insoluble in water.


Describe how you would find out if it is a basic, an acidic or an amphoteric oxide.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

(c) When antimony chloride is added to water, a faint white precipitate forms and the mixture
slowly goes cloudy.

forward
SbCl 3(aq) + H2O(l) 2HCl (aq) + SbOCl (s)
colourless backward white

(i) Explain why after some time the appearance of the mixture remains unchanged.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) When a few drops of concentrated hydrochloric acid are added to the mixture, it
changes to a colourless solution. Suggest an explanation.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Suggest how you could make the colourless solution go cloudy.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/O/N/11


5
For
4 The structure of an element or compound determines its physical properties. Examiner’s
Scandium fluoride and silicon(IV) oxide have giant structures. Use

(a) Scandium fluoride is an ionic compound.

(i) The valency of scandium is three. Draw a diagram which shows the formula of the
compound, the charges on the ions and the arrangement of the valency electrons
around the negative ion.
Use x to represent an electron from a scandium atom.
Use o to represent an electron from a fluorine atom.

[3]

(ii) The melting point of scandium fluoride is 1552 °C. Explain why scandium fluoride
has a high melting point.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Silicon(IV) oxide has a macromolecular structure.

(i) Describe the structure of silicon(IV) oxide. You may use a diagram.

[3]

(ii) How does the electrical conductivity of these two compounds differ?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Explain the difference in conductivity.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/O/N/11 [Turn over


6
For
5 The alcohols form a homologous series. Two characteristics of a homologous series are Examiner’s
that the physical properties of the members vary in a predictable way and they have similar Use
chemical properties.

(a) Complete the table.

mass of one boiling point


name formula
mole / g / °C

methanol CH3 – OH 32 64

ethanol CH3 – CH2 – OH 46 78

propan-1-ol CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – OH 60 98

butan-1-ol CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – OH 74 118

pentan-1-ol 138

hexan-1-ol CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – OH 102

[3]

(b) Give two other characteristics of a homologous series.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in one molecule of
the covalent compound methanol.
Use x to represent an electron from a carbon atom.
Use o to represent an electron from an oxygen atom.
Use ● to represent an electron from a hydrogen atom.

[3]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/O/N/11


7
For
(d) Alcohols can be oxidised to carboxylic acids by heating with acidic potassium Examiner’s
manganate(VII). Use

(i) Draw the structural formula of the carboxylic acid formed by the oxidation of
propan-1-ol. Show all the bonds.

[1]

(ii) Describe how ethanol could be oxidised to ethanoic acid by fermentation.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(e) Propan-1-ol and ethanoic acid react together to form an ester. Give its name and structural
formula.

name ........................................................................................................................... [1]

formula

[1]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/O/N/11 [Turn over


8
For
6 Soluble salts can be made by the neutralisation of an acid by a base. Insoluble salts can be Examiner’s
made by precipitation. Use

(a) The following is a brief description of the preparation of the soluble salt,
nickel(II) chloride-6-water, from the insoluble base nickel(II) carbonate.

Nickel(II) carbonate is added in small amounts to hot dilute hydrochloric acid until it is
in excess. The mixture is filtered. The filtrate is partially evaporated and then allowed to
cool until crystals of nickel(II) chloride-6-water form.

(i) Why is it necessary to use excess carbonate?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Explain why it is necessary to filter.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Why partially evaporate rather than evaporate to dryness?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) What additional steps are needed to obtain dry crystals?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Potassium chloride can be made from hydrochloric acid and potassium carbonate.

(i) Why must a different experimental method be used for this preparation?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Give a description of the different method used for this salt preparation.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [4]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/O/N/11


9
For
(c) Insoluble salts are made by precipitation. An equation for the preparation of barium Examiner’s
sulfate is given below. Use

BaCl 2(aq) + MgSO4(aq) → BaSO4(s) + MgCl 2(aq)

This reaction can be used to find x in the formula for hydrated magnesium sulfate
MgSO4.xH2O.

A known mass of hydrated magnesium sulfate, MgSO4.xH2O, was dissolved in water.


Excess aqueous barium chloride was added. The precipitate of barium sulfate was
filtered, washed and dried. Finally it was weighed.

Mass of hydrated magnesium sulfate = 1.476 g

Mass of barium sulfate formed = 1.398 g

The mass of one mole of BaSO4 = 233 g

The number of moles of BaSO4 formed = ............... [1]

The number of moles of MgSO4.xH2O = ............... [1]

The mass of one mole of MgSO4.xH2O = ............... g [1]

The mass of one mole of MgSO4 = 120 g

The mass of xH2O in one mole of MgSO4.xH2O = ............... [1]

x = ............... [1]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/O/N/11 [Turn over


10
For
7 Petrol is a mixture of hydrocarbons and additives. The combustion of petrol in car engines is Examiner’s
a major source of air pollution. This is reduced by catalytic converters. Use

(a) Petrol is obtained from the gasoline fraction, boiling point range 40 °C to 100 °C, from the
distillation of petroleum. Explain the term fraction.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) In many countries, a lead compound of the type Pb(C2H5)n used to be added to petrol to
improve its combustion. After combustion, lead oxide was formed.

LEADED

98 OCTANE

(i) Octane is a constituent of petrol. Write the equation for the complete combustion of
octane.

C8H18 + ...............O2 → ............... + ............... [2]

(ii) Dibromoethane was added to petrol to remove the lead oxide from inside the engine.
Lead bromide was formed which escaped into the environment through the exhaust.
Leaded petrol cannot be used with a catalytic converter. Give another reason why
leaded petrol is no longer used.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) What does each of the following tell you about the structure of dibromoethane?

dibromo ......................................................................................................................

eth ..............................................................................................................................

ane ....................................................................................................................... [2]

(iv) What additional information is needed to draw the structural formula of


dibromoethane?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/O/N/11


11
For
(c) An analysis of the compound, Pb(C2H5)n , showed that 0.026 moles of Pb was combined Examiner’s
with 0.104 moles of C2H5 groups. Use
What is the value of n? Show how you arrived at your answer.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Some of the pollutants emitted by vehicle exhausts are carbon monoxide, oxides of
nitrogen and unburnt hydrocarbons. Explain how the emission of these gases is reduced
by a catalytic converter.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2011 0620/32/O/N/11


© UCLES 2011
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/32/O/N/11
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209

Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
w
w
w
.X
t
re
m
eP
ap
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education

s.
co
m
*1895357616*

CHEMISTRY 0620/33
Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. For Examiner’s Use
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 1

Total

This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB11 11_0620_33/2RP
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
2
For
1 Use your copy of the Periodic Table to answer these questions. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Choose an element from the Periodic Table to match each description.
You may give either the name or the symbol.

(i) It is the most reactive metal. ................................................................................ [1]

(ii) It is the only non-metal which is a liquid at r.t.p.. ................................................. [1]

(iii) An isotope of this element is used as a fuel in nuclear reactors. ......................... [1]

(iv) This Group VII element is a solid at r.t.p.. ............................................................ [1]

(v) This element is in Group V and Period 4. ............................................................ [1]

(vi) This unreactive gas is used to fill lamps. ............................................................. [1]

(b) Predict the formula of each of the following compounds.

(i) germanium oxide .......................................................................................................

(ii) tellurium bromide ................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Give the formula of each of the following ions.

(i) strontium ....................................................................................................................

(ii) fluoride ................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/O/N/11


3
For
2 Starch, a complex carbohydrate, is a natural macromolecule or polymer. Examiner’s
It can be formed from its monomer by condensation polymerisation. Use

(a) (i) Explain the terms:

monomer ...................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

condensation polymerisation ......................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Draw the structural formula of starch to include three monomer units.

Glucose, the monomer, can be represented as HO OH .

[3]

(b) Starch can be hydrolysed to simple sugars by heating with dilute sulfuric acid or by
warming with a dilute solution of saliva. The reaction can be catalysed by H+ ions from
the acid or by the enzymes in saliva.

(i) What is an enzyme?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Explain why, if the saliva / starch mixture is heated above 70 °C, the hydrolysis stops.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) The complete acid-catalysed hydrolysis of starch forms only glucose.


The partial acid-catalysed hydrolysis of starch forms a mixture of sugars which
includes glucose. Describe how you could identify the different sugars in this mixture.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/O/N/11 [Turn over


4
For
3 Fertilisers are used to promote plant growth. Examiner’s
Two fertilisers are ammonium phosphate, (NH4)3PO4, and calcium dihydrogenphosphate, Use
Ca(H2PO4)2.

(a) Describe a test to distinguish between these two fertilisers.

test ....................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

result .................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Many fertilisers are manufactured from ammonia. Describe how ammonia is made in the
Haber process. Give the essential conditions and an equation for the process.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

(c) State the essential plant nutrient not supplied by ammonium phosphate.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) The soluble compound, calcium dihydrogenphosphate is made by heating the insoluble
mineral rock phosphate, Ca3(PO4)2, with sulfuric acid.

(i) Why would rock phosphate not be effective as a fertiliser?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) The phosphate ion, PO43–, from the rock phosphate is changed into the
dihydrogenphosphate ion, H2PO4–.

PO43– + 2H2SO4 → H2PO4– + 2HSO4–

What type of reagent is the phosphate ion? Give a reason for your choice.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(e) The extensive use of fertilisers and possibly the effect of acid rain tend to increase the
acidity of the soil. State why it is necessary to control soil acidity and explain how this can
be done.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/O/N/11


5
For
4 (a) Steel rusting is an example of an oxidation reaction. Examiner’s
Use
(i) Define the term steel.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Define oxidation in terms of electron transfer.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) A method of preventing steel rusting is sacrificial protection.

steel pipe
connected block of
electrically magnesium
to steel pipe

Give an explanation, in terms of electron transfer, why the steel does not rust.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Another method of preventing steel rusting is cathodic protection.

power
steel girder – +
cathode inert anode
titanium rod

bubbles of
hydrogen gas sea water

(i) Write an equation for the formation of the gas given off at the steel cathode during
cathodic protection.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Give one difference between the two methods.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/O/N/11 [Turn over


6
For
5 The reactions in this question are all examples of photochemical reactions. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Explain the phrase photochemical reaction.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Many millions of years ago, the Earth’s atmosphere was rich in carbon dioxide and
contained negligible amounts of oxygen. After the appearance of green plant-like
bacteria, the proportions of these two gases in the atmosphere changed.

(i) What are the approximate percentages of these two gases in the atmosphere now?

carbon dioxide = .................................................................................................. [1]

oxygen = .............................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Explain how the green plant-like bacteria changed the composition of the atmosphere.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [4]

(c) The reduction of silver(I) bromide to silver is the basis of film photography.

2AgBr → 2Ag + Br2


white black

An opaque object is placed on a piece of paper coated with silver(I) bromide which is
then exposed to a bright light. The light is switched off and the opaque object removed.

opaque white
e.g. thick
cardboard paper coated with
silver(I) bromide black

before exposed to light after exposed to light


cardboard removed

Explain how the image is formed.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/O/N/11


7
For
6 Nickel is a transition element. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Predict three differences in the chemical properties of nickel and barium.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) Nickel ores are converted into nickel(II) oxide. This can be reduced to impure nickel by
heating with carbon. The nickel is purified by the following reversible reaction.

Ni(s) + 4CO(g) Ni(CO)4(g)


nickel carbonyl

(i) Impure nickel is heated at 60 °C. The forward reaction occurs.

Ni(s) + 4CO(g) → Ni(CO)4(g)


impure

The nickel carbonyl, a gas, moves into a hotter chamber at 200 °C. The backward
reaction occurs and the nickel carbonyl decomposes.

Ni(CO)4(g) → Ni(s) + 4CO(g)


pure

Is the forward reaction exothermic or endothermic? Give a reason for your answer.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Explain why the forward reaction is favoured by an increase in pressure.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Suggest what happens to the impurities.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/O/N/11 [Turn over


8
For
(iv) Suggest another method of refining nickel. Give a brief description of the method Examiner’s
which you have suggested. A labelled diagram is acceptable. Use

[4]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/O/N/11


9
For
7 The alkenes are a series of unsaturated hydrocarbons. They have the general molecular Examiner’s
formula CnH2n. Use

(a) Deduce the molecular formula of an alkene which has a relative molecular mass of 126.
Show your working.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) The structural formula of propene is drawn below.

H H H

H C C C

H H

(i) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in one molecule
of this covalent compound.
Use x to represent an electron from an atom of carbon.
Use o to represent an electron from an atom of hydrogen.

[3]

(ii) Draw the structure of the polymer formed from propene

[2]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/O/N/11 [Turn over


10
For
(iii) Bond energy is the amount of energy, in kJ, which must be supplied to break one Examiner’s
mole of the bond. Use

bond energy
bond
in kJ / mol
H—H +436
C C +610
C—C +346
C—H +415

Use the data in the table to show that the following reaction is exothermic.

H H H H H H

H C C C + H H → H C C C H

H H H H H

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(c) This question is concerned with some of the addition reactions of but-1-ene.

(i) Name the product formed when but-1-ene reacts with water.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Complete the equation.

CH3 — CH2 — CH CH2 + Br2 → ..................................................................... [2]

(iii) Deduce the formula of the compound which reacts with but-1-ene to form
1-iodobutane.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/O/N/11


11

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2011 0620/33/O/N/11


© UCLES 2011
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/33/O/N/11
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209

Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
w
w
w
.X
t
re
m
eP
ap
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education

s.
co
m
*1129003385*

CHEMISTRY 0620/31
Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. For Examiner’s Use
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 1

Total

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

IB12 11_0620_31/2RP
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2
For
1 A list of techniques used to separate mixtures is given below. Examiner’s
Use
filtration
diffusion
fractional distillation
simple distillation
crystallisation
chromatography

From this list, choose the most suitable technique to separate the following mixtures.
A technique may be used once, more than once or not at all.

(a) butane from a mixture of propane and butane ........................................................... [1]

(b) oxygen from liquid air ................................................................................................. [1]

(c) water from aqueous magnesium sulfate ..................................................................... [1]

(d) potassium chloride from aqueous potassium chloride ................................................ [1]

(e) silver chloride from a mixture of silver chloride and water .......................................... [1]

(f) glucose from a mixture of glucose and maltose ......................................................... [1]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2012 0620/31/O/N/12


3
For
2 Three of the halogens in Group VII are listed below. Examiner’s
Use
chlorine
bromine
iodine

(a) (i) How does their colour change down the Group?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) How do their melting points and boiling points change down the Group?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Predict the colour and physical state (solid, liquid or gas) of astatine, At.

colour .........................................................................................................................

physical state ....................................................................................................... [2]

53 I ,
131
(b) A radioactive isotope of iodine, is used to treat cancer.

(i) Define the term isotope.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

53 I ?
131
(ii) How many protons, electrons and neutrons are there in one atom of

number of protons ..............


number of electrons ............
number of neutrons ............ [2]

53 I , emits radiation, a different element with a proton number of


(iii) When this isotope, 131
54 is formed.
What is the name of this element?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Fluorine, the most reactive halogen, forms compounds with the other halogens. It forms
two compounds with bromine.
Deduce their formulae from the following information.

compound 1
The mass of one mole of this compound is 137 g.
Its formula is ................................. [1]

compound 2
0.02 moles of this compound contain 0.02 moles of bromine atoms and 0.1 moles of
fluorine atoms.
Its formula is ................................. [1]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2012 0620/31/O/N/12 [Turn over


4
For
3 The speed (rate) of a chemical reaction depends on a number of factors which include Examiner’s
temperature and the presence of a catalyst. Use

(a) Reaction speed increases as the temperature increases.

(i) Explain why reaction speed increases with temperature.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(ii) Reactions involving enzymes do not follow the above pattern.


The following graph shows how the speed of such a reaction varies with temperature.

speed

temperature

Suggest an explanation why initially the reaction speed increases then above a
certain temperature the speed decreases.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) An organic compound decomposes to give off nitrogen.

C6H5N2Cl (aq) → C6H5Cl (l) + N2(g)

The speed of this reaction can be determined by measuring the volume of nitrogen
formed at regular intervals. Typical results are shown in the graph below.

volume of
nitrogen

0
0 time

(i) The reaction is catalysed by copper.


Sketch the graph for the catalysed reaction on the diagram above. [2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/31/O/N/12


5
For
(ii) How does the speed of this reaction vary with time? Examiner’s
Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Why does the speed of reaction vary with time?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Catalytic converters reduce the pollution from motor vehicles.

oxides of nitrogen less harmful gases


and carbon monoxide to atmosphere

catalysts: rhodium,
platinum, palladium

(i) Describe how carbon monoxide and the oxides of nitrogen are formed in car engines.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [4]

(ii) Describe the reaction(s) inside the catalytic converter which change these pollutants
into less harmful gases. Include at least one equation in your description.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 17]

© UCLES 2012 0620/31/O/N/12 [Turn over


6
For
4 Silicon(IV) oxide, SiO2, and zirconium(IV) oxide, ZrO2, are both macromolecules. Examiner’s
They have similar physical properties but silicon(IV) oxide is acidic and zirconium(IV) oxide Use
is amphoteric.

(a) Define the term macromolecule.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) (i) Predict three physical properties of these two oxides.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(ii) Name an element which has the same physical properties as these two oxides.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) (i) Name a reagent that reacts with the oxides of both elements.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Name a reagent that reacts with only one of the oxides.

reagent ......................................................................................................................

oxide which reacts ............................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2012 0620/31/O/N/12


7
For
5 Carbonyl chloride, COCl 2, is widely used in industry to make polymers, dyes and Examiner’s
pharmaceuticals. Use

(a) Carbonyl chloride was first made in 1812 by exposing a mixture of carbon monoxide and
chlorine to bright sunlight. This is a photochemical reaction.

CO(g) + Cl 2(g) → COCl 2(g)

(i) Explain the phrase photochemical reaction.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Give another example of a photochemical reaction and explain why it is important
either to the environment or in industry.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) Carbonyl chloride is now made by the reversible reaction given below.

CO(g) + Cl 2(g) COCl 2(g)

The forward reaction is exothermic.


The reaction is catalysed by carbon within a temperature range of 50 to 150 °C.

(i) Predict the effect on the yield of carbonyl chloride of increasing the pressure.
Explain your answer.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) If the temperature is allowed to increase to above 200 °C, very little carbonyl chloride
is formed. Explain why.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Explain why a catalyst is used.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2012 0620/31/O/N/12 [Turn over


8
For
(c) The structural formula of carbonyl chloride is given below. Examiner’s
Use
Cl

C O

Cl

Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the outer (valency) electrons in one molecule
of this covalent compound.

Use o to represent an electron from a carbon atom.


Use x to represent an electron from a chlorine atom.
Use ● to represent an electron from an oxygen atom.

[3]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2012 0620/31/O/N/12


9
For
6 A sandwich contains three of the main constituents of food. Examiner’s
Use
bread contains
complex carbohydrates
butter
contains fat

meat contains
protein

(a) (i) These constituents of food can be hydrolysed by boiling with acid or alkali.
Complete the table.

constituent of food product of hydrolysis

protein
fat
complex carbohydrate
[3]

(ii) What type of synthetic polymer contains the same linkage as

fats, ......................................................

proteins? .............................................. [2]

(b) An incomplete structural formula of a protein is given below.


Complete this diagram by inserting the linkages.

insert insert
linkage linkage
[2]

(c) Butter contains mainly saturated fats. Fats based on vegetable oils, such as olive oil,
contain mainly unsaturated fats.

A small amount of fat was dissolved in an organic solvent.


Describe how you could determine if the fat was saturated or unsaturated.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2012 0620/31/O/N/12 [Turn over


10
For
7 Both strontium and sulfur have chlorides of the type XCl 2. The table below compares some Examiner’s
of their properties. Use

strontium chloride sulfur chloride


appearance white crystals red liquid
formula SrCl 2 SCl 2
melting point / °C 874 –120
boiling point / °C 1250 59
conductivity of liquid good poor
dissolves to form reacts to form a
solubility in water
a neutral solution solution of pH 1

(a) (i) Use the data in the table to explain why sulfur chloride is a liquid at room temperature,
25 °C.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Strontium is a metal and sulfur is a non-metal. Explain why both have chlorides of
the type XCl 2.
The electron distribution of a strontium atom is 2 + 8 + 18 + 8 + 2.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Deduce the name of the acidic compound formed when sulfur chloride reacts with
water.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) Explain the difference in the electrical conductivity of liquid strontium chloride and
liquid sulfur chloride.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2012 0620/31/O/N/12


11
For
(b) Strontium chloride-6-water can be made from the insoluble compound, strontium Examiner’s
carbonate, by the following reactions. Use

SrCO3(s) + 2HCl (aq) → SrCl 2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)

SrCl 2 (aq) + 6H2O(l) → SrCl 2.6H2O(s)

The following method was used to prepare the crystals.

1 Add excess strontium carbonate to hot hydrochloric acid.


2 Filter the resulting mixture.
3 Partially evaporate the filtrate and allow to cool.
4 Filter off the crystals of SrCl 2.6H2O.
5 Dry the crystals between filter papers.

(i) How would you know when excess strontium carbonate had been added in step 1?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Why is it necessary to filter the mixture in step 2?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) In step 3, why partially evaporate the filtrate rather than evaporate to dryness?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) In the above experiment, 50.0 cm3 of hydrochloric acid of concentration 2.0 mol / dm3 was
used. 6.4 g of SrCl 2.6H2O was made.
Calculate the percentage yield.

number of moles of HCl used = ............................

number of moles of SrCl 2.6H2O which could be formed = ............................

mass of one mole of SrCl 2.6H2O is 267 g

theoretical yield of SrCl 2.6H2O = ............................g

percentage yield = ............................% [4]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2012 0620/31/O/N/12 [Turn over


© UCLES 2012
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/31/O/N/12
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209

Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
w
w
w
.X
t
re
m
eP
ap
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education

s.
co
m
*1580108680*

CHEMISTRY 0620/32
Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. For Examiner’s Use
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 1

Total

This document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB12 11_0620_32/2RP
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2
For
1 This question is concerned with the elements in Period 5, Rb to Xe. Examiner’s
Use
(a) The electron distributions of some of these elements are given in the following list.

element A 2 + 8 + 18 + 8 + 2
element B 2 + 8 + 18 + 18 + 8
element C 2 + 8 + 18 + 18 + 5
element D 2 + 8 + 18 + 18 + 6
element E 2 + 8 + 18 + 18 + 4
element F 2 + 8 + 18 + 18 + 7

(i) Identify element C. ............................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Which element in the list does not form any compounds?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Which element in the list forms a chloride of the type XCl 2?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) Which two elements would react together to form a compound of the type XY4?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(v) Which element in the list would react with cold water to form an alkaline solution and
hydrogen?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Predict two differences in physical properties and two differences in chemical properties
between rubidium and the transition metal niobium.

physical .............................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

chemical ...........................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/O/N/12


3
For
2 The diagram shows a heating curve for a sample of compound X. Examiner’s
Use

D
80 E

temperature / °C

B
15 C
A
time

(a) Is X a solid, a liquid or a gas at room temperature, 20 °C?

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Write an equation for the equilibrium which exists in region BC.

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Name the change of state which occurs in region DE.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) Explain how the curve shows that a pure sample of compound X was used.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/O/N/12 [Turn over


4
For
3 Many organic compounds which contain a halogen have chloro, bromo or iodo in their name. Examiner’s
Use
(a) The following diagram shows the structure of 1-chloropropane.

H H H

H C C C Cl

H H H

(i) Draw the structure of an isomer of this compound.

[1]

(ii) Describe how 1-chloropropane could be made from propane.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Suggest an explanation why the method you have described in (ii) does not produce
a pure sample of 1-chloropropane.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Organic halides react with water to form an alcohol and a halide ion.

CH3–CH2–I + H2O → CH3–CH2–OH + I –

(i) Describe how you could show that the reaction mixture contained an iodide ion.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Name the alcohol formed when 1-chloropropane reacts with water.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/O/N/12


5
For
(c) The speed (rate) of reaction between an organic halide and water can be measured by Examiner’s
the following method. Use

A mixture of 10 cm3 of aqueous silver nitrate and 10 cm3 of ethanol is warmed to 60 °C.
Drops of the organic halide are added and the time taken for a precipitate to form is
measured.

Silver ions react with the halide ions to form a precipitate of the silver halide.

Ag+(aq) + X–(aq) → AgX(s)

Typical results for four experiments, A, B, C and D, are given in the table.

experiment organic halide number of drops time / min

A bromobutane 4 6
B bromobutane 8 3
C chlorobutane 4 80
D iodobutane 4 0.1

(i) Explain why it takes longer to produce a precipitate in experiment A than in B.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) How does the order of reactivity of the organic halides compare with the order of
reactivity of the halogens?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Explain why the time taken to produce a precipitate would increase if the experiments
were repeated at 50 °C.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/O/N/12 [Turn over


6
For
4 Iron is extracted from its ore, hematite, in the blast furnace. Examiner’s
Use
waste gases

raw materials:
coke, C
limestone, CaCO3
firebrick lining hematite, Fe2O3

air

slag

molten iron

(a) The temperature inside the blast furnace can rise to 2000 °C.
Write an equation for the exothermic reaction which causes this high temperature.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Carbon monoxide is formed in the blast furnace. This reduces the ore hematite, Fe2O3,
to iron.

(i) Explain how carbon monoxide is formed in the blast furnace.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Write an equation for the reduction of hematite by carbon monoxide.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Explain why it is necessary to add limestone, calcium carbonate, to the blast furnace.
Include an equation in your explanation.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/O/N/12


7
For
(d) Most of the iron from the blast furnace is converted into mild steel. A method of preventing Examiner’s
the steel from rusting is coating it with zinc. Use

(i) What is the name of this method of rust prevention?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Explain, using the idea of electron transfer, why zinc-coated steel does not rust even
when the coating is scratched and the steel is in contact with oxygen and water.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/O/N/12 [Turn over


8
For
5 The food additive E220 is sulfur dioxide. It is a preservative for a variety of foods and drinks. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State two other uses of sulfur dioxide.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) How is sulfur dioxide manufactured?

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Sulfur dioxide is a reductant (reducing agent). Describe what you would see when
aqueous sulfur dioxide is added to acidified potassium manganate(VII).

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Sulfur dioxide can also be made by the reaction between a sulfite and an acid.

Na2SO3 + 2HCl → 2NaCl + SO2 + H2O

Excess hydrochloric acid was added to 3.15 g of sodium sulfite. Calculate the maximum
volume, measured at r.t.p., of sulfur dioxide which could be formed.
The mass of one mole of Na2SO3 is 126 g.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/O/N/12


9
For
6 During electrolysis, ions move in the electrolyte and electrons move in the external circuit. Examiner’s
Reactions occur at the electrodes. Use

(a) The diagram shows the electrolysis of molten lithium iodide.

+ –

external circuit

electrode electrode

molten lithium iodide

heat

(i) Draw an arrow on the diagram to show the direction of the electron flow in the
external circuit. [1]

(ii) Electrons are supplied to the external circuit. How and where is this done?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Explain why solid lithium iodide does not conduct electricity but when molten it is a
good conductor.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) The results of experiments on electrolysis are shown in the following table. Complete the
table. The first line has been done as an example.

product at product at change to


electrolyte electrodes
cathode anode electrolyte

molten lithium iodide carbon lithium iodine used up

aqueous copper(II) sulfate platinum oxygen

concentrated aqueous
carbon chlorine
potassium chloride

[4]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/O/N/12 [Turn over


10
For
(c) The diagram below shows the electrolysis of dilute sulfuric acid. Hydrogen is formed at Examiner’s
the negative electrode (cathode) and oxygen at the positive electrode (anode) and the Use
concentration of sulfuric acid increases.

+ –

carbon anode carbon cathode

dilute sulfuric acid

bubbles of bubbles of
oxygen gas hydrogen gas

The ions present in the dilute acid are H+(aq), OH–(aq) and SO42–(aq).

(i) Write an equation for the reaction at the negative electrode (cathode).

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Complete the equation for the reaction at the positive electrode (anode).

4OH–(aq) → O2(g) + .....H2O(l) + ....... [1]

(iii) Suggest an explanation of why the concentration of the sulfuric acid increases.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) In the apparatus used in (c), the power supply is removed and immediately replaced by
a voltmeter.

voltmeter
V

carbon anode carbon cathode

dilute sulfuric acid

bubbles of bubbles of
oxygen gas hydrogen gas

A reading on the voltmeter shows that electrical energy is being produced. Suggest an
explanation for how this energy is produced.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/O/N/12


11
For
7 The alcohols form a homologous series. The first member of this series is methanol, CH3OH. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Give the general formula of the alcohols.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) The mass of one mole of an alcohol is 116 g. What is its formula?
Show your reasoning.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(iii) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the outer (valency) electrons in one
molecule of methanol.

Use x to represent an electron from a carbon atom.


Use o to represent an electron from a hydrogen atom.
Use ● to represent an electron from an oxygen atom.

[3]

(b) Methanol is manufactured using the following method.

CH4(g) + H2O(g) → CO(g) + 3H2(g) reaction 1

CO(g) + 2H2(g) CH3OH(g) reaction 2

The conditions for reaction 2 are:

pressure 100 atmospheres


catalyst a mixture of copper, zinc oxide and aluminium oxide
temperature 250 °C

The forward reaction is exothermic.

(i) Why is high pressure used in reaction 2?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/O/N/12 [Turn over


12
For
(ii) Explain why using a catalyst at 250 °C is preferred to using a higher temperature of Examiner’s
350 °C and no catalyst. Use

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(c) Methanol is oxidised by atmospheric oxygen. This reaction is catalysed by platinum.

(i) The products of this reaction include a carboxylic acid. Give its name and structural
formula.

name .......................................................

structural formula showing all bonds

[2]

(ii) Deduce the name of the ester formed by the reaction of methanol with the carboxylic
acid named in (i).

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/O/N/12


13

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/O/N/12


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/O/N/12


15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2012 0620/32/O/N/12


© UCLES 2012
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/32/O/N/12
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209

Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
w
w
w
.X
t
re
m
eP
ap
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

er
International General Certificate of Secondary Education

s.
co
m
*8141362656*

CHEMISTRY 0620/33
Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. For Examiner’s Use
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 1

Total

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

IB12 11_0620_33/3RP
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
2

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/O/N/12


3
For
1 For each of the following, select an element from Period 4, potassium to krypton, which Examiner’s
matches the description. Use

(a) A metal that reacts rapidly with cold water to form a compound of the type M(OH)2 and
hydrogen.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Its only oxidation state is 0. ........................................................................................ [1]

(c) It has a macromolecular oxide, XO2, which has similar physical properties to those of
diamond.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) This is one of the metals alloyed with iron in stainless steel. ..................................... [1]

(e) It can be reduced to an ion of the type X–. .................................................................. [1]

(f) It can form a covalent hydride having the formula H2X. .............................................. [1]

(g) Its soluble salts are blue and its oxide is black. .......................................................... [1]

(h) It is a liquid at room temperature. ............................................................................... [1]

[Total: 8]

2 (a) State a use for each of the following gases.

(i) chlorine ................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) argon ................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) ethene .................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) oxygen ................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Describe how oxygen is obtained from air.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/O/N/12 [Turn over


4
For
3 (a) A small amount of liquid bromine is added to a container which is then sealed. Examiner’s
Use
Br2(l) → Br2(g)

Use the ideas of the Kinetic Theory to explain why, after about an hour, the bromine
molecules have spread uniformly to occupy the whole container.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) The diagrams below show simple experiments on the speed of diffusion of gases.

porous pot
allows gas hydrogen
air
molecules porous pot
to diffuse
air air

higher level

large
same level
beaker

coloured
liquid

diagram 1 diagram 2

higher
level
air

carbon dioxide

large beaker

diagram 3

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/O/N/12


5
For
Complete the following explanations. Diagram 1 has been done for you. Examiner’s
Use
Diagram 1

There is air inside and outside the porous pot so the rate of diffusion of air into the pot is
the same as the rate of diffusion of air out of the pot. The pressure inside and outside the
pot is the same so the coloured liquid is at the same level on each side of the tube.

Diagram 2

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

Diagram 3

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/O/N/12 [Turn over


6
For
4 Zinc alloys have been used for over 2500 years. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Explain the phrase zinc alloy.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Making alloys is still a major use of zinc. State one other large scale use of zinc.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Describe the bonding in a typical metal, such as zinc, and then explain why it is
malleable. You may use a diagram to illustrate your answer.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [3]

(iv) Suggest why the introduction of a different atom into the structure makes the alloy
less malleable than the pure metal.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Zinc metal is made by the reduction of zinc oxide. The major ore of zinc is zinc blende,
ZnS. Zinc blende contains silver and lead compounds as well as zinc sulfide.
Zinc blende is converted into impure zinc oxide by heating it in air.

2ZnS + 3O2 → 2ZnO + 2SO2

(i) Describe how zinc oxide is reduced to zinc.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Some of the zinc oxide is dissolved in sulfuric acid to make aqueous zinc sulfate.
Write a balanced symbol equation for this reaction.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/O/N/12


7
For
(iii) This impure solution of zinc sulfate contains zinc ions, silver(I) ions and lead ions. Examiner’s
Explain why the addition of zinc powder produces pure zinc sulfate solution. Use
Include at least one ionic equation in your explanation.

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [4]

(iv) Describe how zinc metal can be obtained from zinc sulfate solution by electrolysis.
A labelled diagram is acceptable. Include all the products of this electrolysis. The
electrolysis is similar to that of copper(II) sulfate solution with inert electrodes.

[4]

[Total: 18]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/O/N/12 [Turn over


8
For
5 Propenoic acid is an unsaturated carboxylic acid. The structural formula of propenoic acid is Examiner’s
given below. Use

H COOH

C C

H H

(a) (i) Describe how you could show that propenoic acid is an unsaturated compound.

test .............................................................................................................................

result ..........................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Without using an indicator, describe how you could show that a compound is an
acid.

test .............................................................................................................................

result ..........................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Propenoic acid reacts with ethanol to form an ester. Deduce the name of this ester. Draw
its structural formula.

name of ester ....................................................................................................................

structural formula showing all bonds

[3]

(c) An organic compound has a molecular formula C6H8O4. It is an unsaturated carboxylic


acid. One mole of the compound reacts with two moles of sodium hydroxide.

(i) Explain the phrase molecular formula.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/O/N/12


9
For
(ii) One mole of this carboxylic acid reacts with two moles of sodium hydroxide. Examiner’s
How many moles of –COOH groups are there in one mole of this compound? Use

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) What is the formula of another functional group in this compound?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) Deduce a structural formula of this compound.

[1]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/O/N/12 [Turn over


10
For
6 Until recently, arsenic poisoning, either deliberate or accidental, has been a frequent cause Examiner’s
of death. The symptoms of arsenic poisoning are identical with those of a common illness, Use
cholera. A reliable test was needed to prove the presence of arsenic in a body.

(a) In 1840, Marsh devised a reliable test for arsenic.

hydrochloric
acid

cold surface

black stain
shows presence
H2 and arsine of arsenic
pieces of zinc burning
and arsenic compound

Hydrogen is formed in this reaction. Any arsenic compound reacts with this hydrogen to
form arsine which is arsenic hydride, AsH3.
The mixture of hydrogen and arsine is burnt at the jet and arsenic forms as a black stain
on the glass.

(i) Write an equation for the reaction which forms hydrogen.

.............................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Draw a diagram which shows the arrangement of the outer (valency) electrons in
one molecule of the covalent compound arsine.
The electron distribution of arsenic is 2 + 8 + 18 + 5.

Use x to represent an electron from an arsenic atom.


Use o to represent an electron from a hydrogen atom.

[2]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/O/N/12


11
For
(b) Another hydride of arsenic has the composition below. Examiner’s
Use
arsenic 97.4 % hydrogen 2.6 %

(i) Calculate the empirical formula of this hydride from the above data.
Show your working.

....................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................[2]

(ii) The mass of one mole of this hydride is 154 g. What is its molecular formula?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) Deduce the structural formula of this hydride.

[1]

(c) Hair is a natural protein. Hair absorbs arsenic from the body. Analysis of the hair provides
a measurement of a person’s exposure to arsenic. To release the absorbed arsenic for
analysis, the protein has to be hydrolysed.

(i) What is the name of the linkage in proteins?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Name a reagent which can be used to hydrolyse proteins.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) What type of compound is formed by the hydrolysis of proteins?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/O/N/12 [Turn over


12
For
(d) In the 19th Century, a bright green pigment, copper(II) arsenate(V) was used to kill rats Examiner’s
and insects. In damp conditions, micro-organisms can act on this compound to produce Use
the very poisonous gas, arsine.

(i) Suggest a reason why it is necessary to include the oxidation states in the name of
the compound.

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) The formula for the arsenate(V) ion is AsO43–. Complete the ionic equation for the
formation of copper(II) arsenate(V).

......Cu2+ + ......AsO43– → ..................................


[2]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/O/N/12


13
For
7 Ammonia is made by the Haber process. Examiner’s
Use
N2(g) + 3H2(g) 2NH3(g)

(a) State one major use of ammonia.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Describe how hydrogen is obtained for the Haber process.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) This reaction is carried out at a high pressure, 200 atmospheres.


State, with an explanation for each, two advantages of using a high pressure.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [5]

(d) (i) What is the difference between an endothermic and an exothermic reaction?

....................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/O/N/12 [Turn over


14
For
(ii) Bond breaking is an endothermic process. Bond energy is the amount of energy Examiner’s
needed to break or form one mole of the bond. Complete the table and explain why Use
the forward reaction is exothermic.

N N + 3H H 2H N H

bond energy energy change exothermic


bond
kJ / mol kJ or endothermic

N N 944 +944 endothermic


H—H 436 3 × 436 = +1308
N—H 388

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/O/N/12


15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2012 0620/33/O/N/12


© UCLES 2012
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/33/O/N/12
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209

Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac

Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*5421214333*

CHEMISTRY 0620/31
Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2014
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

IB14 11_0620_31/2RP
© UCLES 2014 [Turn over
2

1 (a) Match the following pH values to the solutions given below.

1 3 7 10 13

The solutions all have the same concentration.

solution pH

aqueous ammonia, a weak base ............

dilute hydrochloric acid, a strong acid ............

aqueous sodium hydroxide, a strong base ............

aqueous sodium chloride, a salt ............

dilute ethanoic acid, a weak acid ............


[5]

(b) Explain why solutions of hydrochloric acid and ethanoic acid with the same concentration, in
mol / dm3, have a different pH.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Measuring pH is one way of distinguishing between a strong acid and a weak acid.
Describe another method.

method .......................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

results ........................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2014 0620/31/O/N/14


3

2 Two macromolecular forms of carbon are graphite and diamond. The structures of graphite and
diamond are given below.

graphite diamond

(a) Explain in terms of its structure why graphite is soft and is a good conductor of electricity.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) State two uses of graphite which depend on the above properties.

It is soft ......................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

It is a good conductor of electricity ............................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(c) Silicon(IV) oxide also has a macromolecular structure.

(i) Describe the macromolecular structure of silicon(IV) oxide.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Predict two physical properties which diamond and silicon(IV) oxide have in common.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2014 0620/31/O/N/14 [Turn over


4

3 The main use of sulfur dioxide is the manufacture of sulfuric acid.

(a) State two other uses of sulfur dioxide.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) One source of sulfur dioxide is burning sulfur in air.


Describe how sulfur dioxide can be made from the ore zinc sulfide.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) The Contact process changes sulfur dioxide into sulfur trioxide.

2SO2(g) + O2(g) 2SO3(g)


the forward reaction is exothermic
temperature 400 to 450 °C
low pressure 1 to 10 atmospheres
catalyst vanadium(V) oxide

(i) What is the formula of vanadium(V) oxide?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Vanadium(V) oxide is an efficient catalyst at any temperature in the range 400 to 450 °C.
Scientists are looking for an alternative catalyst which is efficient at 300 °C.
What would be the advantage of using a lower temperature?

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) The process does not use a high pressure because of the extra expense.
Suggest two advantages of using a high pressure?
Explain your suggestions.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [4]

© UCLES 2014 0620/31/O/N/14


5

(d) Sulfuric acid is made by dissolving sulfur trioxide in concentrated sulfuric acid to form oleum.
Water is reacted with oleum to form more sulfuric acid.
Why is sulfur trioxide not reacted directly with water?

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2014 0620/31/O/N/14 [Turn over


6

4 Iron is extracted from the ore hematite in the Blast Furnace.

waste gases

raw materials:
coke, C
firebrick lining iron ore, Fe2O3
limestone, CaCO3

CO forms

CO2 forms
air
slag
molten iron

(a) The coke reacts with the oxygen in the air to form carbon dioxide.

C + O2 → CO2

(i) Explain why carbon monoxide is formed higher in the Blast Furnace.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Write an equation for the reduction of hematite, Fe2O3, by carbon monoxide.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) (i) Limestone decomposes to form two products, one of which is calcium oxide.
Name the other product.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Calcium oxide reacts with silicon(IV) oxide, an acidic impurity in the iron ore, to form slag.
Write an equation for this reaction.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) Explain why the molten iron and the molten slag form two layers and why molten iron is
the lower layer.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iv) Suggest why the molten iron does not react with the air.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2014 0620/31/O/N/14


7

(c) Iron and steel rust. Iron is oxidised to hydrated iron(III) oxide, Fe2O3.2H2O, which is rust.

(i) Name the two substances which cause iron to rust.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain why an aluminium article coated with aluminium oxide is protected from further
corrosion but a steel article coated with rust continues to corrode.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) There are two electrochemical methods of rust prevention.

(i) The first method is sacrificial protection.

Explain why the steel article does not rust.

steel pipe
connected block of zinc
electrically
to steel pipe

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [4]

The second method is to make the steel article the cathode in a circuit for electrolysis.

power
– +
steel girder
inert anode

bubbles of
hydrogen gas sea-water

(ii) Mark on the diagram the direction of the electron flow. [1]

(iii) The steel girder does not rust because it is the cathode. Reduction takes place at the
cathode. Give the equation for the reduction of hydrogen ions.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 19]

© UCLES 2014 0620/31/O/N/14 [Turn over


8

5 Three common pollutants in the air are carbon monoxide, the oxides of nitrogen, NO and NO2, and
unburnt hydrocarbons. They are all emitted by motor vehicles.

(a) Describe how the oxides of nitrogen are formed.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Describe how a catalytic converter reduces the emission of these three pollutants.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(c) Other atmospheric pollutants are lead compounds from leaded petrol.
Explain why lead compounds are harmful.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2014 0620/31/O/N/14


9

6 Esters, polyesters and fats all contain the ester linkage.

(a) Esters can be made from alcohols and carboxylic acids. For example, the ester ethyl ethanoate
can be made by the following reaction.

CH3COOH + CH3CH2OH → CH3COOCH2CH3 + H2O

(i) Name the carboxylic acid and the alcohol from which the following ester could be made.

CH3 CH2 CH2 C

O CH3

name of carboxylic acid ......................................................................................................

name of alcohol ..................................................................................................................


[2]

(ii) 6.0 g of ethanoic acid, Mr = 60, was reacted with 5.5 g of ethanol, Mr = 46.
Determine which is the limiting reagent and the maximum yield of ethyl ethanoate, Mr = 88.

number of moles of ethanoic acid = .............................................................................. [1]

number of moles of ethanol = ....................................................................................... [1]

the limiting reagent is .................................................................................................... [1]

number of moles of ethyl ethanoate formed = .............................................................. [1]

maximum yield of ethyl ethanoate = ............................................................................. [1]

(b) The following two monomers can form a polyester.

HOOC COOH HO OH

Draw the structural formula of this polyester. Include two ester linkages.

[3]

© UCLES 2014 0620/31/O/N/14 [Turn over


10

(c) Fats and vegetable oils are esters. The formulae of two examples of natural esters are given
below.

CH2 CO2 C17H33 CH2 CO2 C17H35

CH CO2 C17H33 CH CO2 C17H35

CH2 CO2 C17H33 CH2 CO2 C17H35

ester 1 ester 2

(i) One ester is saturated, the other is unsaturated.


Describe a test to distinguish between them.

test ......................................................................................................................................

result with unsaturated ester ..............................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

result with saturated ester ..................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................
[3]

(ii) Deduce which one of the above esters is unsaturated. Give a reason for your choice.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) Both esters are hydrolysed by boiling with aqueous sodium hydroxide.
What types of compound are formed?

............................................................... and .............................................................. [2]

[Total: 17]

© UCLES 2014 0620/31/O/N/14


11

7 Nitrogen can form ionic compounds with reactive metals and covalent compounds with non-metals.

(a) Nitrogen reacts with lithium to form the ionic compound lithium nitride, Li3N.

(i) Write the equation for the reaction between lithium and nitrogen.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Lithium nitride is an ionic compound. Draw a diagram which shows its formula, the charges
on the ions and the arrangement of the valency electrons around the negative ion.

Use x for an electron from a lithium atom.


Use o for an electron from a nitrogen atom.

[2]

(b) Nitrogen fluoride is a covalent compound.

(i) Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of the valency electrons in one molecule of the
covalent compound nitrogen trifluoride, NF3.

Use x for an electron from a nitrogen atom.


Use o for an electron from a fluorine atom.

[2]

(ii) Lithium nitride has a high melting point, 813 °C. Nitrogen trifluoride has a low melting point,
–207 °C.
Explain why the melting points are different.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2014 0620/31/O/N/14 [Turn over


© UCLES 2014
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/31/O/N/14
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.


133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227

Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*1845295131*

CHEMISTRY 0620/32
Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2014
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB14 11_0620_32/2RP
© UCLES 2014 [Turn over
2

1 An important aspect of chemistry is purity and methods of purification.

(a) Give an example of substances used in everyday life which must be pure.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) A list of techniques used to separate mixtures is given below.

chromatography crystallisation diffusion dissolving

evaporation filtration fractional distillation simple distillation

(i) From the list, choose the most suitable technique to separate the following.

water from sea-water ..........................................................................................................

helium from a mixture of helium and methane ...................................................................

ethanol from a mixture of ethanol and propanol .................................................................

iron filings from a mixture of iron filings and water .............................................................

a mixture of two amino acids, glycine and alanine .............................................................


[5]

(ii) Describe how you would obtain a pure sample of copper(II) sulfate-5-water crystals from
a mixture of copper(II) sulfate-5-water with copper(II) oxide using some of the techniques
listed above.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [4]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2014 0620/32/O/N/14


3

2 Aluminium is obtained by the reduction of aluminium ions to aluminium atoms.

(a) Write an ionic equation for the reduction of an aluminium ion to an aluminium atom.

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) The original method of extracting aluminium involved the reduction of aluminium chloride using
the reactive metal sodium. Aluminium obtained by this method was very expensive due to the
high cost of extracting sodium from sodium chloride.

(i) Complete the equation for this reduction.

Al Cl 3 + .......Na → ........... + ...........


[2]

(ii) How can sodium metal be obtained from sodium chloride?

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) In the modern method, aluminium is obtained by the electrolysis of aluminium oxide (alumina)
dissolved in molten cryolite, Na3Al F6.

waste gases,
O2, CO2, CO, F2

carbon anode (+)

mixture of aluminium
carbon cathode (–) oxide and cryolite

molten aluminium

(i) The major ore of aluminium is impure aluminium oxide.


What is the name of this ore?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) This ore is a mixture of aluminium oxide, which is amphoteric, and iron(III) oxide which is
basic.
Explain how these two oxides can be separated by the addition of aqueous sodium
hydroxide.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2014 0620/32/O/N/14 [Turn over


4

(iii) Give two reasons why the electrolyte contains cryolite.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iv) The mixture of gases evolved at the positive electrode includes:

carbon dioxide
carbon monoxide
fluorine
oxygen

Explain the presence of these gases in the gaseous mixture formed at the positive
electrode. Include at least one equation in your explanation.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [5]

(d) A major use of aluminium is the manufacture of pots and pans. One reason for this is its
resistance to corrosion.

(i) Explain why aluminium, a reactive metal, is resistant to corrosion.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Suggest two other reasons why aluminium is suitable for making pots and pans.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 19]

© UCLES 2014 0620/32/O/N/14


5

3 (a) A hydrocarbon has the following structural formula.

H H

H C C H

H C C H
H H

(i) State the molecular formula and the empirical formula of this hydrocarbon.

molecular formula ...............................................................................................................

empirical formula ................................................................................................................


[2]

(ii) Draw the structural formula of an isomer of the above hydrocarbon.

[1]

(iii) Explain why these two hydrocarbons are isomers.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iv) Are these two hydrocarbons members of the same homologous series?
Give a reason for your choice.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Alkenes can be made from alkanes by cracking.

(i) Explain the term cracking.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) One mole of an alkane, when cracked, produced one mole of hexane, C6H14, and two
moles of ethene.
What is the molecular formula of the original alkane?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2014 0620/32/O/N/14 [Turn over


6

(c) Alkenes are used in polymerisation reactions and addition reactions.

(i) Draw the structural formula of the product formed by the addition polymerisation of
but-2-ene. Its formula is given below.

H H

C C

H 3C CH3

[3]

(ii) Give the name and structural formula of the addition product formed from ethene and
bromine.

name ...................................................................................................................................

structural formula

[2]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2014 0620/32/O/N/14


7

4 Zinc is an important metal. Its uses include making alloys and the construction of dry cells (batteries).

(a) Name an alloy which contains zinc. What is the other metal in this alloy?

name of alloy .............................................................................................................................

other metal in alloy ....................................................................................................................


[2]

(b) The main ore of zinc is zinc blende, ZnS.

(i) The ore is heated in the presence of air to form zinc oxide and sulfur dioxide.
Write the equation for this reaction.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Give a major use of sulfur dioxide.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Zinc can be obtained from zinc oxide in a two step process. Aqueous zinc sulfate is made from
zinc oxide and then this solution is electrolysed with inert electrodes. The electrolysis is similar
to that of copper(II) sulfate with inert electrodes.

(i) Name the reagent which will react with zinc oxide to form zinc sulfate.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Complete the following for the electrolysis of aqueous zinc sulfate.

Write the equation for the reaction at the negative electrode.

.............................................................................................................................................

Name the product at the positive electrode.

.............................................................................................................................................

The electrolyte changes from zinc sulfate to .................................................................... .


[3]

© UCLES 2014 0620/32/O/N/14 [Turn over


8

(d) A dry cell (battery) has a central rod, usually made of graphite. This is the positive electrode which
is surrounded by the electrolyte, typically a paste of ammonium chloride and manganese(IV)
oxide, all of which are in a zinc container which is the negative electrode.

wire
electrons flow
graphite
when cell
electrode
produces
energy
zinc
electrode

electrolyte which is a paste of


ammonium chloride
and manganese(IV) oxide

(i) Draw an arrow on the diagram to indicate the direction of electron flow. [1]

(ii) Suggest why the electrolyte is a paste.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) The following changes occur in a dry cell.


For each change, decide if it is oxidation or reduction and give a reason for your choice.

Zn to Zn2+

.............................................................................................................................................

manganese(IV) oxide to manganese(III) oxide

.............................................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2014 0620/32/O/N/14


9

5 (a) Glucose, sucrose and starch are all carbohydrates. Their formulae are:

glucose, C6H12O6,
sucrose, C12H22O11,
starch, (C6H10O5)n.

(i) Identify two common features in the formulae of these carbohydrates.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Draw the structure of a complex carbohydrate, such as starch. The formula of glucose,
can be represented by
HO OH

Include three glucose units in the structure.

[2]

(b) Starch hydrolyses to glucose in the presence of the enzyme, amylase.


What is meant by the term enzyme?

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2014 0620/32/O/N/14 [Turn over


10

(c) The effect of temperature on this reaction can be studied by the experiment shown below.
Starch and iodine form a blue-black colour.
Glucose and iodine do not form a blue-black colour.

teat pipette to add a


few drops of iodine

water at different
temperatures

aqueous starch and


amylase (enzyme)

The experiment is set up as in the diagram and the time measured for the mixture to change
from blue-black to colourless. The experiment is repeated at different temperatures.
Typical results of this experiment are given in the table below.

time for blue-black


temperature
experiment colour to disappear
/ °C
/ min

A 20 30
B 40 15
C 70 remained blue-black

(i) Put the experiments in order of reaction rate – slowest first and fastest last.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain why the reaction rates in experiments A and B are different.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(iii) Suggest why the colour remains blue-black in experiment C.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2014 0620/32/O/N/14


11

6 Sulfuric acid is an important acid, both in the laboratory and in industry.


Sulfuric acid is manufactured in the Contact Process. Originally, it was made by heating metal
sulfates and by burning a mixture of sulfur and potassium nitrate.

(a) Give a major use of sulfuric acid.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) A group of naturally occurring minerals have the formula of the type FeSO4.xH2O where x is 1,
4, 5, 6 or 7. The most common of these minerals is iron(II) sulfate-7-water.

(i) When this mineral is heated gently it dehydrates.

FeSO4.7H2O FeSO4 + 7H2O


green pale yellow

Describe how you could show that this reaction is reversible.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) When the iron(II) sulfate is heated strongly, further decomposition occurs.

2FeSO4(s) → Fe2O3(s) + SO2(g) + SO3(g)

The gases formed in this reaction react with water and oxygen to form sulfuric acid.
Explain how the sulfuric acid is formed.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) A mineral of the type FeSO4.xH2O contains 37.2% of water.


Complete the calculation to determine x.

mass of one mole of H2O = 18 g

mass of water in 100 g of FeSO4.xH2O = 37.2 g

number of moles of H2O in 100 g of FeSO4.xH2O = .................

mass of FeSO4 in 100 g of FeSO4.xH2O = ................. g

mass of one mole of FeSO4 = 152 g

number of moles of FeSO4 in 100 g of FeSO4.xH2O = .................

x = .................
[4]

© UCLES 2014 0620/32/O/N/14 [Turn over


12

(c) When a mixture of sulfur and potassium nitrate is burned and the products are dissolved in
water, sulfuric acid is formed.

(i) The sulfuric acid formed by this method is not pure. It contains another acid.
Deduce the identity of this acid.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) The heat causes some of the potassium nitrate to decompose.


Write the equation for the action of heat on potassium nitrate.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2014 0620/32/O/N/14


13

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 0620/32/O/N/14


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 0620/32/O/N/14


15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 0620/32/O/N/14


© UCLES 2014
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/32/O/N/14
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.


133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227

Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*8916450001*

CHEMISTRY 0620/33
Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2014
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

IB14 11_0620_33/RP
© UCLES 2014 [Turn over
2

1 For each of the following elements give one physical property and one chemical property.

(a) bromine (Br2)

physical property .......................................................................................................................

chemical property ......................................................................................................................


[2]

(b) carbongraphite(C)

physical property .......................................................................................................................

chemical property ......................................................................................................................


[2]

(c) manganese (Mn)

physical property .......................................................................................................................

chemical property ......................................................................................................................


[2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/O/N/14


3

2 Compound X is a colourless liquid at room temperature.

(a) A sample of pure X was slowly heated from –5.0 °C, which is below its melting point, to 90 °C,
which is above its boiling point. Its temperature is measured every minute and the results are
represented on the graph.

F
90 °C
D
E

temperature

B
t °C C

A
–5 °C
time

(i) Complete the equation for the equilibrium present in the region BC.

X(s) .................... [1]

(ii) What is the significance of temperature t °C?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) What is the physical state of compound X in the region EF?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) What would be the difference in the region BC if an impure sample of X had been used?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Compound X is a hydrocarbon. It contains 85.7% of carbon. The mass of one mole of X is 84 g.

(i) What is the percentage of hydrogen in the compound ?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Calculate the empirical formula of X. Show your working.

empirical formula = ................................ [3]

(iii) What is the molecular formula of compound X?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/O/N/14 [Turn over


4

3 In 1985 the fullerenes were discovered. They are solid forms of the element carbon. The structure
of the C60 fullerene is given below.

(a) (i) In the C60 fullerene, how many other carbon atoms is each carbon atom bonded to?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Another fullerene has a relative molecular mass of 840.


How many carbon atoms are there in one molecule of this fullerene?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Fullerenes are soluble in liquid hydrocarbons such as octane. The other solid forms of carbon
are insoluble.
Describe how you could obtain crystals of fullerenes from soot which is a mixture of fullerenes
and other solid forms of carbon.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(c) A mixture of a fullerene and potassium is an excellent conductor of electricity.

(i) Which other form of solid carbon is a good conductor of electricity?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain why metals, such as potassium, are good conductors of electricity.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) The mixture of fullerene and potassium has to be stored out of contact with air. There are
substances in unpolluted air which will react with potassium.
Name two potassium compounds which could be formed when potassium is exposed to
air.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/O/N/14


5

4 A fuel cell produces electrical energy by the oxidation of a fuel by oxygen.


The fuel is usually hydrogen but methane and methanol are two other fuels which may be used.
A diagram of a hydrogen fuel cell is given below.

H2

e–
anode
V
cathode
e–

H 2O O2

(a) When the fuel is hydrogen, the only product is water.


What additional product would be formed if methane was used?

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Write the equation for the chemical reaction that takes place in a hydrogen fuel cell.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) (i) At which electrode does oxidation occur? Explain your choice.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Write an ionic equation for the reaction at this electrode.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Fuel cells are used to propel cars.


Give two advantages of a fuel cell over a gasoline-fuelled engine.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/O/N/14 [Turn over


6

5 (a) Sodium chlorate(I) decomposes to form sodium chloride and oxygen. The rate of this reaction
is very slow at room temperature provided the sodium chlorate(I) is stored in a dark bottle to
prevent exposure to light.

2NaCl O → 2NaCl + O2

The rate of this decomposition can be studied using the following experiment.

20 40 60 80 100

oxygen collects
in syringe

sodium chlorate(I) solution

Sodium chlorate(I) is placed in the flask and 0.2 g of copper(II) oxide is added. This catalyses
the decomposition of the sodium chlorate(I) and the volume of oxygen collected is measured
every minute. The results are plotted to give a graph of the type shown below.

volume
of oxygen

0
0 time

(i) Explain why the gradient (slope) of this graph decreases with time.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Cobalt(II) oxide is a more efficient catalyst for this reaction than copper(II) oxide.
Sketch, on the grid, the graph for the reaction catalysed by cobalt(II) oxide.
All other conditions were kept constant. [2]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/O/N/14


7

(iii) What can you deduce from the comment that sodium chlorate(I) has to be shielded from
light?

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) Explain, in terms of collisions between particles, why the initial gradient would be steeper
if the experiment was repeated at a higher temperature.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) The ions present in aqueous sodium chloride are Na+(aq), Cl –(aq), H+(aq) and OH–(aq).

The electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium chloride forms three products. They are
hydrogen, chlorine and sodium hydroxide.

(i) Explain how these three products are formed. Give ionic equations for the reactions at the
electrodes.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [4]

(ii) If the solution of the electrolyte is stirred, chlorine reacts with sodium hydroxide to form
sodium chlorate(I), sodium chloride and water.
Write an equation for this reaction.

Cl 2 + ...NaOH → ..................... + ..................... + .....................


[2]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/O/N/14 [Turn over


8

6 Rubidium and strontium are very reactive metals at the top of the reactivity series. Because their
ions have different charges, their compounds behave differently when heated.

(a) The formulae of the ions of these two elements are Rb+ and Sr2+.
Explain why these metals, which are in different groups, form ions which have different charges.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Strontium carbonate is similar to calcium carbonate. It is insoluble in water and it decomposes
when heated. Rubidium carbonate is soluble in water and does not decompose when heated.

(i) Describe a method to prepare a pure sample of the insoluble salt, strontium carbonate, by
precipitation.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [4]

(ii) Complete the equation for the decomposition of strontium carbonate.

SrCO3 → ............ + ............


[1]

(c) Metal nitrates decompose when heated.

(i) Rubidium nitrate decomposes as follows:

2RbNO3 → 2RbNO2 + O2

What is the name of the compound RbNO2?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) The nitrates of most other metals decompose in a different way.


Complete the equation for the decomposition of strontium nitrate.

.......Sr(NO3)2 → ............ + 4NO2 + ............


[2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/O/N/14


9

7 Butane is oxidised to a mixture of carboxylic acids by oxygen in the presence of a catalyst.


The acids formed are methanoic acid, ethanoic acid and propanoic acid – the first three members
of the carboxylic acid homologous series.

(a) (i) Give the name and structural formula of the fourth member of this series.

name ...................................................................................................................................

structural formula showing all the atoms and bonds

[3]

(ii) State three characteristics of a homologous series.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(iii) All members of this series are weak acids.

What is meant by the term weak acid ?

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) Carboxylic acids react with alcohols to form esters. Ethanol reacts with ethanoic acid to form
the ester ethyl ethanoate, CH3COOCH2CH3.

(i) Give the name and formula of the ester which is formed from methanol and propanoic
acid.

name ...................................................................................................................................

formula ................................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) What is the name of the ester which has the formula CH3COOCH3?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/O/N/14 [Turn over


10

(c) (i) Complete the equation for the oxidation of butane to propanoic acid.

3C4H10 + .........O2 → 4C2H5COOH + .......H2O


[1]

(ii) Name another compound which can be oxidised to propanoic acid.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/O/N/14


11

8 (a) Describe how cobalt chloride paper can be used to test for the presence of water.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Complete the description of the preparation of crystals of the soluble salt, cobalt(II)
chloride-6-water, CoCl 2.6H2O, from the insoluble base, cobalt(II) carbonate.

CoCO3(s) + 2HCl (aq) → CoCl 2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)

50 cm3 of dilute hydrochloric acid, concentration 2.2 mol / dm3, was heated and cobalt(II)

carbonate was added in small amounts until .............................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(c) 6.31 g of cobalt(II) chloride-6-water crystals were obtained. Calculate the percentage yield to
1 decimal place.

number of moles of HCl in 50 cm3 of acid, concentration 2.2 mol / dm3 = ..............

maximum number of moles of CoCl 2.6H2O which could be formed = ..............

mass of 1 mole of CoCl 2.6H2O = 238 g

maximum yield of CoCl 2.6H2O = .............. g

percentage yield = ..............%


[4]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2014 0620/33/O/N/14 [Turn over


© UCLES 2014
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/33/O/N/14
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.


133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227

Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*7761599169*

CHEMISTRY 0620/31

Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2015


1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

IB15 11_0620_31/3RP
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
2

1 (a) The symbols of six particles are shown below.

Na+ Ca2+ Kr P Si O2–

Select from the list of particles to answer the following questions. A particle may be selected
once, more than once or not at all.

(i) Which two ions have the same electronic structure? . .................................................. [1]

(ii) Which ion has the same electronic structure as an atom of argon? . ............................ [1]

(iii) Which atom can form an ion of the type X3–? ................................................................ [1]

(iv) Which atom can form a hydride which has a formula of the type XH4? . ....................... [1]

(b) (i) How many protons, neutrons and electrons are there in one copper(II) ion 64
29 Cu 2+ ?

number of protons .....................

number of neutrons .....................

number of electrons .....................


[2]

(ii) 45
21 Sc represents an atom of scandium.

How many nucleons and how many charged particles are there in one atom of scandium?

number of nucleons .....................

number of charged particles .....................


[2]

23 24
(c) Two different atoms of sodium are 11 Na and 11 Na .

(i) Explain why these two atoms are isotopes.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) 24
11 Na is radioactive. It changes into an atom of a different element which has one more
proton.

Identify this element.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) State two uses of radioactive isotopes.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/O/N/15


3

2 Describe how to separate the following. In each example, give a description of the procedure used
and explain why this method works.

(a) Copper powder from a mixture containing copper and zinc powders.

procedure ...................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

explanation .................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................
[3]

(b) Nitrogen from a mixture of nitrogen and oxygen.

procedure ...................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

explanation .................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................
[3]

(c) Glycine from a mixture of the two amino acids glycine and alanine. Glycine has the lower Rf
value.

procedure ...................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

explanation .................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(d) Magnesium hydroxide from a mixture of magnesium hydroxide and zinc hydroxide.

procedure ...................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

explanation .................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................
[3]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/O/N/15 [Turn over


4

3 Sulfuric acid is made by the Contact process.

(a) Sulfur is burned by spraying droplets of molten sulfur into air.

Suggest and explain an advantage of using this method.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) The following equation represents the equilibrium in the Contact process.

2SO2(g) + O2(g) 2SO3(g)

Oxygen is supplied from the air.


The composition of the reaction mixture is 1 volume of sulfur dioxide to 1 volume of oxygen.

What volume of air contains 1 dm3 of oxygen?

....................................................................................................................................... dm3 [1]

(c) Sulfur dioxide is more expensive than air.

What is the advantage of using an excess of air?

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(d) The forward reaction is exothermic. The reaction is usually carried out at a temperature between
400 and 450 °C.

(i) What is the effect on the position of equilibrium of using a temperature above 450 °C?
Explain your answer.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) What is the effect on the rate of using a temperature below 400 °C?
Explain your answer.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/O/N/15


5

(e) A low pressure, 2 atmospheres, is used. At equilibrium, about 98% SO3 is present.

(i) What is the effect on the position of equilibrium of using a higher pressure?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain why a higher pressure is not used.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(f) Name the catalyst used in the Contact process.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(g) Describe how concentrated sulfuric acid is made from sulfur trioxide.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/O/N/15 [Turn over


6

4 (a) Synthetic polymers are disposed of in landfill sites and by burning.

(i) Describe two problems caused by the disposal of synthetic polymers in landfill sites.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Describe one problem caused by burning synthetic polymers.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) State two uses of synthetic polymers.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) The structural formulae of two synthetic polymers are given below.

CH2 CH CH2 CH
polymer A
CH3 CH3

O O O O
polymer B
C C O O C C O O

(i) Draw the structural formula of the monomer of polymer A.

[2]

(ii) Identify the functional group circled in polymer B.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Deduce the two types of organic compound which have reacted to form polymer B.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/O/N/15


7

(d) Explain the difference between addition and condensation polymers. Classify A and B as
either addition or condensation polymers.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/O/N/15 [Turn over


8

5 (a) A compound, X, contains 55.85% carbon, 6.97% hydrogen and 37.18% oxygen.

(i) How does this prove that compound X contains only carbon, hydrogen and oxygen?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Use the above percentages to calculate the empirical formula of compound X.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) The Mr of X is 86.

What is its molecular formula?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) (i) Bromine water changes from brown to colourless when added to X.

What does this tell you about the structure of X?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Magnesium powder reacts with an aqueous solution of X. Hydrogen is evolved.

What does this tell you about the structure of X?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) X contains two different functional groups.

Draw a structural formula of X.

[1]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/O/N/15


9

6 Carbon and silicon are elements in Group IV. They both form oxides of the type XO2.

(a) Silicon(IV) oxide, SiO2, has a macromolecular structure.

(i) Describe the structure of silicon(IV) oxide.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) State three properties which silicon(IV) oxide and diamond have in common.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [3]

(iii) How could you show that silicon(IV) oxide is acidic and not basic or amphoteric?

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Explain why the physical properties of carbon dioxide are different from those of diamond and
silicon(IV) oxide.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/O/N/15 [Turn over


10

7 The rate of a photochemical reaction is affected by light.

(a) The decomposition of silver bromide is the basis of film photography. This is a redox reaction.

2AgBr → 2Ag + Br2


cream black

step 1 2Br – → Br2 + 2e–

step 2 Ag+ + e– → Ag

(i) Which step is reduction? Explain your answer.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Which ion is the oxidising agent? Explain your answer.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) A piece of white paper was coated with silver bromide and exposed to the light. Sections of the
paper were covered as shown in the diagram.

paper coated with


silver bromide

not covered

covered with
thin paper

covered with
thick card

Predict the appearance of the different sections of the paper after exposure to the light and the
removal of the card. Explain your predictions.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [4]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/O/N/15


11

(c) Photosynthesis is another example of a photochemical reaction. Green plants can make simple
carbohydrates, such as glucose. These can polymerise to make more complex carbohydrates,
such as starch.

(i) Write a word equation for photosynthesis.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Name the substance which is responsible for the colour in green plants and is essential for
photosynthesis.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) The structural formula of glucose can be represented by H O O H.

Draw part of the structural formula of starch which contains two glucose units.

[2]

(iv) Living organisms need carbohydrates for respiration.

What is meant by respiration?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2015 0620/31/O/N/15 [Turn over


© UCLES 2015
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements

the live examination series.


Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/31/O/N/15
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209

Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*7234333226*

CHEMISTRY 0620/32
Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2015
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

IB15 11_0620_32/FP
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
2

1 Use your copy of the Periodic Table to help you answer some of these questions.

(a) Predict the formulae of the following compounds.

(i) nitrogen fluoride ..................................................................................................................

(ii) phosphorus sulfide .............................................................................................................


[2]

(b) Deduce the formulae of the following ions.

(i) selenide ..............................................................................................................................

(ii) gallium ................................................................................................................................


[2]

(c) Use the following ions to determine the formulae of the compounds.

ions OH– Cr3+ Ba2+ SO42–

compounds

(i) chromium(III) sulfate ..........................................................................................................

(ii) barium hydroxide ................................................................................................................


[2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/O/N/15


3

2 (a) Polluted air contains two oxides of carbon and two oxides of nitrogen. A major source of these
pollutants is motor vehicles.

(i) Describe how carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide are formed in motor vehicle engines.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) State one adverse effect of each of these gases.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) Nitrogen monoxide, NO, is released by motor vehicle exhausts.

Explain how nitrogen monoxide is formed in motor vehicle engines.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iv) When nitrogen monoxide is released into the atmosphere, nitrogen dioxide, NO2, is formed.

Suggest an explanation why this happens.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Predict the possible adverse effect on the environment when this non-metal oxide, NO2, reacts
with water and oxygen.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) How are the amounts of carbon monoxide and nitrogen monoxide emitted by modern motor
vehicles reduced? Include an equation in your answer.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/O/N/15 [Turn over


4

3 Two of the main uses of zinc are for galvanising and for making alloys.

One of the main ores of zinc is zinc blende, ZnS. There are two stages in the extraction of zinc from
this ore.

(a) Stage 1 Zinc oxide is made from zinc blende.

Describe how this is done and write a word equation for the reaction.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Stage 2 Zinc oxide is reduced to zinc.

Write a word equation for the reduction of zinc oxide by coke.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) The zinc produced by this process is impure. It can be purified by electrolysis using a method
which is similar to the purification of copper. Under the conditions used in the process, zinc is
the product at the negative electrode (cathode).

Complete the following description of this purification.

The electrolyte is aqueous ................................................................................................. . [1]

The negative electrode (cathode) is made of .................................................................... . [1]

The positive electrode (anode) is impure zinc.

The equation for the reaction at the cathode is ................................................................. . [1]

The equation for the reaction at the anode is .................................................................... . [1]

Explain why the concentration of the electrolyte does not change.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/O/N/15


5

(d) Brass is an alloy which contains zinc.

(i) Name the other metal in brass.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Suggest two reasons why an alloy such as brass is preferred to either of its constituent
metals.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(e) In an experiment to investigate the rate of rusting of steel, three pieces of steel were used. One
piece of steel was completely coated with copper, one piece completely coated with zinc and
the third piece was left uncoated. All three pieces were left exposed to the atmosphere.

(i) Explain why the uncoated piece started to rust.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) The coating on both of the other two pieces was scratched, exposing the steel.

exposed steel thin layer


does not rust of zinc

steel

The piece of steel coated with zinc still did not rust but the copper-coated piece of steel
rusted very rapidly.

Explain these observations in terms of the formation of ions and the transfer of electrons.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [4]

[Total: 17]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/O/N/15 [Turn over


6

4 (a) Propane reacts with chlorine to form a mixture of chloropropanes. This is a photochemical
reaction.

(i) What is meant by the phrase photochemical reaction?

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) The products of this reaction include two isomers, one of which has the following structural
formula.

H H H

H C C C Cl

H H H

Draw the structural formula of the other isomer.

[1]

(iii) Explain why these two different compounds are isomers.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/O/N/15


7

(b) Bond breaking is an endothermic change and bond forming is an exothermic change.

Bond energy is the amount of energy in kJ / mol needed to break one mole of the specified
bond.

H H H H H H

H C C C H + Cl Cl → H C C C Cl + H Cl

H H H H H H

Use the following bond energies to determine whether this reaction is exothermic or
endothermic. You must show your reasoning.

bond energies
bond
in kJ / mol
C–Cl 338
C–H 412
Cl –Cl 242
H–Cl 431
C–C 348

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/O/N/15 [Turn over


8

(c) (i) Chloropropane can be hydrolysed to propanol, CH3CH2CH2OH, by sodium hydroxide.

Write the equation for this reaction.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Propanol can be dehydrated. It loses a water molecule to form a hydrocarbon.

Give the name and structural formula of this hydrocarbon.

name .................................................

structural formula

[2]

(iii) Propanol is oxidised to a carboxylic acid by acidified potassium manganate(VII).

Deduce the name of this acid.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) Propanol reacts with methanoic acid to form the ester propyl methanoate.

CH3CH2CH2OH + HCOOH → HCOOCH2CH2CH3 + H2O

4.0 g of methanoic acid was reacted with 6.0 g of propanol.

(i) Calculate the Mr of methanoic acid = ........................................ [1]

(ii) Calculate the Mr of propanol = ........................................ [1]

(iii) Determine which one is the limiting reagent. Show your reasoning.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iv) Calculate the maximum yield in grams of propyl methanoate, Mr = 88.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 17]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/O/N/15


9

5 Iron is extracted from its ore, hematite, in a blast furnace.

Substances added to the furnace are:


• iron ore, hematite, containing impurities such as silica, SiO2
• air
• coke, C
• limestone, CaCO3

Substances formed in the blast furnace are:


• molten iron
• molten slag
• waste gases such as carbon dioxide

(a) State the two functions of the coke used in the blast furnace.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Write an equation for the conversion of hematite, Fe2O3, to iron.

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Explain how the silica impurity is removed and separated from the molten iron.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(d) The molten iron from the furnace is impure.


It contains impurities which include the element carbon.

Explain how the carbon is removed. Include an equation in your answer.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/O/N/15 [Turn over


10

6 The table below shows the elements in the third period of the Periodic Table, the number of
electrons in their outer energy level, their oxidation state in their common compounds and their
melting points.

element Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
number of outer electrons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
oxidation state +1 +2 +3 +4 / –4 –3 –2 –1 0
melting point / °C 98 650 660 1414 317 115 –101 –189

(a) Describe and explain the variation in oxidation state across the period.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) The first three elements, Na, Mg and Al, are metals.

Describe the structure of a typical metal.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(c) Explain why Na, Mg and Al are good conductors of electricity.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) Which element exists as diatomic molecules of the type X2?

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(e) Silicon has a similar structure to diamond.

Explain why silicon has the highest melting point in the period.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/O/N/15


11

(f) Sodium chloride is a crystalline solid with a high melting point. It dissolves in water to give a
neutral solution. Phosphorus trichloride is a liquid at room temperature. It reacts with water to
form an acidic solution.

Suggest an explanation for these differences in properties.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(g) Describe how you could show that magnesium oxide is a basic oxide and not an amphoteric
oxide.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(h) Draw a dot-and-cross diagram showing the bonding in magnesium oxide. Show outer electrons
only.

[3]

[Total: 17]

© UCLES 2015 0620/32/O/N/15 [Turn over


© UCLES 2015
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements

the live examination series.


Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/32/O/N/15
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
Cambridge International Examinations

  

  
 
  




CHEMISTRY 0620/33
Paper 3 (Extended) October/November 2015
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
 
 
      
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

! 

"  
 #

$! 



  

% " &'% " * 
 

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

IB15 11_0620_33/FP
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
2

1 (a) Describe a chemical test which shows the presence of water.

test .............................................................................................................................................

colour change if water is present ...............................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................
[3]

(b) How could you show that a sample of water is pure?

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Describe how water is treated before it is supplied to homes and industry.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(d) State two industrial uses of water.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 8]

2 Choose from the following list of gases. A gas may be chosen once, more than once or not at all.

sulfur dioxide hydrogen methane carbon monoxide

argon ethene butane

(a) It is used to bleach wood pulp. ............................................................................................ [1]

(b) When burned in oxygen, the only product is water. ............................................................. [1]

(c) It can polymerise. ................................................................................................................ [1]

(d) It is used to provide an inert atmosphere for welding. ......................................................... [1]

(e) When reacted with oxygen, the only product is carbon dioxide. .......................................... [1]

(f) It is produced by the decay of vegetation in the absence of oxygen. .................................. [1]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2015 0620/33/O/N/15


3

3 Lithium bromide is an ionic compound. It can be electrolysed when it is molten or in aqueous


solution. It cannot be electrolysed as a solid.

(a) Solid lithium bromide is a poor conductor of electricity. The ions cannot move to the electrodes,
they are held in an ionic lattice by strong forces.

(i) Describe the motion of the ions in the solid state.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) 
  !  ionic bonding.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) What is meant by the term ionic lattice?

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) The diagram shows the electrolysis of molten lithium bromide.

+ – power pack

carbon
electrodes

molten
lithium bromide

heat

(i) -
4! 

!  !  7 9&;

(ii) Write an ionic equation for the reaction at the negative electrode (cathode).

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Write an ionic equation for the reaction at the positive electrode (anode).

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iv) Which ion is oxidised? Explain your answer.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/33/O/N/15 [Turn over


4

(c) When aqueous lithium bromide is electrolysed, a colourless gas is formed at the negative
electrode and the solution becomes alkaline.

Explain these observations and include an equation in your explanation.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 14]

4 Two homologous series of hydrocarbons are the alkanes and the alkenes.

(a) (i) One general characteristic of a homologous series is that the physical properties vary in a
predictable way.

State three other general characteristics of a homologous series.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) How can the molecular formula of a hydrocarbon show whether it is an alkane or an
alkene?

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) How do alkanes and alkenes differ in their molecular structures?

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/33/O/N/15


5

(b) Cracking is the thermal decomposition of alkanes into smaller hydrocarbons and possibly
hydrogen.

(i) State two conditions required for the cracking of an alkane.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) One type of cracking produces an alkane and an alkene.

Complete an equation for the cracking of heptane into an alkane and an alkene.

C7H16 o ................ + ................ [1]

(iii) Complete an equation for the cracking of heptane into hydrogen and two other products.

C7H16 o ................ + ................ + H2 [1]

(iv) Suggest one reason why cracking is important.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Hydrocarbons burn in excess oxygen to form carbon dioxide and water. 20 cm3 of a gaseous
hydrocarbon burned in an excess of oxygen, 200 cm3. After cooling, the volume of the residual
gas at r.t.p. was 150 cm3, 50 cm3 of which was oxygen.

(i) Determine the volume of the oxygen used.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Determine the volume of the carbon dioxide formed.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) The hydrocarbon was an alkane.

Determine the formula of the hydrocarbon.

[1]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2015 0620/33/O/N/15 [Turn over


6

5 Sulfuric acid is a strong acid. In aqueous solution, it ionises as shown below.

H2SO4 o 2H+ + SO42–

(a) (i) What is meant by the term acid ?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Sulfurous acid, H2SO3, is a weak acid.

State the difference between a weak acid and a strong acid.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b)  




   7!!
! >32–.

When barium nitrate solution is added to aqueous sulfurous acid, a white precipitate, A, forms.

Bromine water changes from brown to colourless when added to aqueous sulfurous acid.

 @
   G   
 #!  !       7!
  
 
 
solution, a different white precipitate, B, is formed.

(i) Identify the white precipitate, A.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Identify the white precipitate, B.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Write an ionic equation for the reduction of the bromine molecule.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) Name the product formed by the oxidation of sulfurous acid.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2015 0620/33/O/N/15


7

(c) Complete the following word equations.

(i) magnesium hydroxide + dilute sulfuric acid

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) zinc + dilute sulfuric acid

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) copper carbonate + dilute sulfuric acid

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) Write equations for the reaction of dilute sulfuric acid with each of the following.

(i) ammonia

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) sodium hydroxide

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) iron

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 16]

© UCLES 2015 0620/33/O/N/15 [Turn over


8

6 A reactivity series of metals is given below.

metal name symbol

sodium Na
most
reactive lithium Li
magnesium Mg
zinc Zn
manganese Mn
iron Fe
least copper Cu
reactive
rhodium Rh

(a) Which two metals will react most vigorously with cold water?

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Which two metals will not react with dilute hydrochloric acid?

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Deduce the formula of iron(III) sulfate.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) What is the formula of a magnesium ion?

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(e) Describe a test-tube experiment which will show that manganese is more reactive than copper.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2015 0620/33/O/N/15


9

(f) Manganese is a typical transition metal.

Predict three physical and two chemical properties of this metal.

physical properties

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

chemical properties

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................
[5]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2015 0620/33/O/N/15 [Turn over


10

7 Two salts can be made from potassium hydroxide and sulfuric acid. They are potassium sulfate,
K2SO4, and the acid salt potassium hydrogen sulfate, KHSO4. They are both made by titration.

burette filled with


sulfuric acid

conical flask

25.0 cm3 of potassium hydroxide solution

(a) 25.0 cm3 of potassium hydroxide, concentration 2.53 mol / dm3, was neutralised by 28.2 cm3 of
dilute sulfuric acid.

2KOH(aq) + H2SO4(aq) o K2SO4(aq) + 2H2O(l)

Calculate the concentration of the sulfuric acid.

number of moles of KOH used = ............................

number of moles of H2SO4 needed to neutralise the KOH = ............................

concentration of dilute sulfuric acid = ............................ mol / dm3


[3]

(b)  !  


 
4 !   
  
    
  
  7!!   
 ! 
indicator used in the titration.

(i) Describe how you could obtain a solution of potassium sulfate without the indicator.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Potassium hydrogen sulfate can be made by the following reaction.

KOH(aq) + H2SO4(aq) o KHSO4(aq) + H2O(l)

Suggest how you could make a solution of potassium hydrogen sulfate without using an
indicator.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/33/O/N/15


11

(c) Describe a test which would distinguish between aqueous solutions of potassium sulfate and
sulfuric acid.

test .............................................................................................................................................

result ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2015 0620/33/O/N/15 [Turn over


© UCLES 2015
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements

the live examination series.


Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/33/O/N/15
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International

You might also like